[go: up one dir, main page]

0% found this document useful (0 votes)
21 views326 pages

JAN-901 Instruction Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1/ 326

JAN-901

ECDIS

INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing the JRC JAN-901 ECDIS.
JAN-901 has been designed to fully meet the safety requirements imposed on bridge systems.
JAN-901 adopts an ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information System) that meets the
performance stan-dards of the IMO (International Maritime Organization) and the IHO
(International Hydro graphic Organization), and serves to improve safety, reduce fuel combustion,
reduce voyage time and automate voyages.

● For the best operation and performance results, read this manual thoroughly before use.
● Keep this manual in a convenient place for future reference.
Make use of this manual when experiencing operation difficulties.
● This LCD uses 1,920,000 or more TFTs (Thin Film Transistor).
If some pixels on the screen are not clear, the color is different, or the screen is brighter than
usual, it is not because of defect, instead it is because of inherent characteristic of the TFT
display technology.
● The information in this manual is subject to change without notice at any time.

i
● Before Operation ●

Pictorial Indication
Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are shown on
these equipment so that you can operate them safely and correctly and
prevent any danger to you and / or to other persons and any damage to your
property during operation. Such indications and their meanings are as
follows.
Please understand them before you read this manual:

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be in danger


of being killed or seriously injured if this indication is neglected and
these equipment are not operated correctly.

This indication is shown where any person is supposed to be injured or


any property damage is supposed to occur if this indication is neglected
and these equipment are not operated correctly.

Examples of pictorial indication


The ▲ mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and WARNING).
Detailed contents of CAUTION (“Electric Shock” in the example on the
Electric left.) is shown in the mark.
shock

The mark represents prohibition.


Detailed contents of the prohibited action (“Disassembling Prohibited” in
the example on the left) is shown in the mark.
Disassembling Prohibition
prohibited
The ● mark represents instruction.
Detailed contents of the instruction (“Disconnect the power plug” in the
example on the left) is shown in the mark.
Disconnect Instruction
the power
plug

Warning label
There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment.
Do not try to remove, break or modify the label.

ii
● Precautions Upon Equipment Operation ●

Do not remove the cover of this set. Otherwise, you may touch a high-voltage part
and suffer from an electrical shock.

Do not disassemble or modify this set. Otherwise, a fire, an electrical shock, or a


failure may occur.

Do not place a vessel containing water, etc. or a metallic object on this set.
When water spills or when water or the object enters the set, a fire, an electrical
shock, or a failure may occur.

Do not insert or remove the power cord or operate switches with a wet hand.
Otherwise, you may suffer from an electrical shock.

Do not damage, break or modify the power cord.


When a heavy object is placed on the cord or the cord is heated, pulled, or forcibly
bent, the cord will be broken resulting in a fire or an electrical shock.

Do not use this set at a voltage other than the supply voltage stated on the set.
Otherwise, a fire, an electrical shock, or a failure may occur.

In the event that you spill or drop any liquids or metals etc., turn off the main unit,
unplug the power supply terminal, and contact our company, branch,or local office.
Continuing operation as is may cause a fire, electric shock or malfunction.

In the event that smoking or burning odors are detected, immediately terminate
operation of the set and contact your dealer.
Continuing operation as is may cause a fire or electrical shock. Never attempt to
service the interior of this set.

iii
Before removing or inserting the cable connector to peripheral equipment, be sure
to turn the power switch off.
Use with the cable connector connected might cause fire or electric shock.

Before removing and inserting the units, and removing and inserting the connector
cable with other units, be sure to turn the power switch off.
Use with the cable connector connected might cause fire or electric shock.

Our contacts
See the list of sales offices at the end of this manual.

iv
Please assign the electrical work for the set to our marketing dept, our branch or
marketing office that is nearest to you. Any electrical work by any person other than
our specialized maintenance persons may cause malfunction of this set.

Do not use or leave alone this set at any place where the CRT tube is exposed to
direct sunlight for a long time or the temperature rises above 50˚C Otherwise, a
malfunction or defect may occur.

Do not place the set in an unstable position such as on a shaking stand or tilting
place.
Otherwise, this set may drop or turn over resulting in an injury.

During installation, firmly connect the earth cable to the earth terminal.
Failure to do so might cause electric shock if the unit malfunctions or current leaks.

When removing the power cord, be sure to remove the power cord terminal correctly.
If the power cord is pulled, the cord may be damaged resulting in a fire or an electrical
shock.

Do not close the ventilation port of the set.


Otherwise, the set that is heated may cause a fire or failure.

When the cleaning the surface, do not use any organic solvent such as thinner or
benzine.
Otherwise, the painting on the surface may be damaged.
For cleaning the surface, remove the dust and refuse and wipe with clean dry cloth.

v
This device is only an aid to navigation.
● The information displayed by the unit cannot be directly used for navigation
purposes.
It must be used together with the appropriate marine charts.
● The unit does not automatically assess position information.
It is the user's responsibility to judge position and navigational information.

Do not touch the unit with hands or gloves made wet with fresh water or salt water.
Doing so might cause electric shock or malfunction.

Do not place this equipment anywhere vibration or impact is likely to occur.


Doing so may cause a fall resulting in injury or damage to property.

Do not insert the disk in Floppy disk drive and CD-ROM drive for long time.
Doing so will cause damage to drive.

vi
◆◆◆◆ PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION ◆◆◆◆

Cautions for high voltage


High voltages from hundreds volts to tens of thousands volts are to be applied to the electronic equipment
such radio and radar devices. You do not face any danger during normal operation, but sufficient cares are
required for maintenance, inspection and adjustment of their internal components.
(Authorized maintenance personnel alone are permitted to implement maintenance, check-ups or adjustment
of internal components.)
High voltages of tens of thousands volts are so dangerous as to bring an instantaneous death from electric
shock, but even voltages of hundreds volts may sometimes lead to a death from electric shock. To prevent
such an accident, make it a rule to turn off the power button, discharge capacitors with a wire surely
earthed on an end and make sure that internal parts are no longer charged before you touch any parts inside
these devices. At the time, wearing dry cotton gloves ensures you further to prevent such danger. It is also
a necessary caution to put one of your hands in the pocket and not to use your both hands at the same time.
It is also important to select a stable foothold always to prevent additional injuries once you were shocked
by electricity. If you were injured from electric shock, disinfect the burn sufficiently and get it taken care
of promptly.

What to do in case of electric shock


When finding a victim of electric shock, turn off the power source and earth the circuit immediately. If it
is impossible to turn off the circuit, move the victim away promptly using insulators such as dry wood plate
and cloth without touching the victim directly.
In case of electric shock, breathing may stop suddenly if current flows to the respiration center in the brain.
If the shock is not so strong, artificial respiration may recover breathing. When shocked by electricity, the
victim will come to look very bad with weak pulse or without beating, resulting in unconsciousness and
rigidity.

vii
◆◆◆◆◆◆◆◆◆ FIRST AID TREATMENTS ◆◆◆◆◆◆◆◆◆

✩ First-aid treatments
As far as the victim of electric shock is not in dangerous condition, do not move him and practice artificial
respiration on him immediately. Once started, it should be continued rhythmically.

(1) Do not touch the victim confusedly as a result of the accident, but the rescuer may also get an electric
shock.
(2) Turn off the power source calmly and certainly and move the victim away quietly from the electric
line.
(3) Call a physician or ambulance immediately or ask someone to call a doctor.
(4) Lay the victim on his back and loosen his necktie, clothes, belt, etc.
(5) a. Examine the victim’s pulse.
b. Examine his heartbeat bringing your ear close to his heart.
c. Examine his breathing bringing the back of your hand or your face close to his face.
d. Check the size of the pupils of his eyes.
(6) Open the victim’s mouth and take out artificial teeth, cigarette or chewing gum if any. Keep his mouth
open, stretch his tongue and insert a towel or the like in his mouth to prevent the tongue from suffocating.
(If it is hard to open his mouth due to set teeth, open it with a screwdriver and insert a towel in this
mouth.)
(7) Then, close his mouth so that foaming mucus does not accumulate inside.

viii
✩ When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped
(1) Tilt the victim’s head back as far as this face looks back. (A pillow may be inserted under his neck.)
(2) Push his jaw upward to open his throat wide (to spread his airway).
(3) Pinch the victim’s nostrils and take a deep breath, block his mouth completely with yours and blow
into his mouth strongly. Take a deep breath again and blow into his mouth. Continue this 10 to 15
times a minute (blocking his nostrils).
(4) Carefully watch that he has recovered his natural breathing and stop practicing artificial respiration.
(5) If it is difficult to open the victim’s mouth, insert a rubber or vinyl tube into one of his nostrils and
blow into it blocking the other nostril and his mouth completely.
(6) When the victim recovers consciousness, he may try to stand up suddenly, but let him lie calmly and
serve him with a cup of hot coffee or tea to keep him warm and quiet. (Never give him alcoholic
drinks.)

Method of mouth-to-mouth respiration by raising head

(A) Raise the victim’s head. Support his


forehead with one of your hand and his
neck with the other hand. → (A)
When you tilt his head backward, the
victim, in most cases, opens his mouth to
the air. This makes mouth-to-mouth
respiration easy.

(B) Cover his mouth as widely as possible


with yours and press your cheek against
his nose →(B), or, pinch his nostrils
with your fingers to prevent air from
leaking. → (C)

(C) Blow into his lungs.


Continue blowing into his mouth until his
breast swells. Blow into his mouth as
quickly as possible for the first 10 times.

Mouth-to-mouth respiration

ix
✩ When both pulse and breathing have stopped
When no pulse has come not to be felt, his pupils are open and no heartbeat is heard, cardiac arrest is
supposed to have occurred and artificial respiration must be performed.

(1) Place your both hands, one hand on the other, on the lower one third area of his breastbone and compress
his breast with your elbows applying your weight on his breast so that it is dented about 2cm (repeat
compressing his breast 50 times or so a minute). (Cardiac massage)
(2) In case of one rescuer,
Repeat cardiac massages about 15 times and blow into his mouth 2 times quickly, and repeat this
combination.
In case of two rescuers,
One person repeats cardiac massages 5 times while the other person blows into his mouth once, and
they shall repeat this combination. (Cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth respiration)
(3) Examine his pupils and his pulse sometimes. When the both have returned to normal, stop the artificial
respiration, serve him with a cup of coffee or tea and keep him warm and calm while watching him
carefully. Commit the victim to a medial specialist depending on his condition. To let him recover
from the mental shock, it is necessary for persons concerned to understand his situations and the
necessary treatments.

(A) (B)

(C) (D)

Cardiac massage

x
Equipment Appearance

xi
Contents
PREFACE ...................................................................................................................................................... i

Before Operation .......................................................................................................................................... ii

Precautions Upon Equipment Operation ................................................................................................... iii

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION ................................................................................................. vii

FIRST AID TREATMENTS ........................................................................................................................ viii

Equipment Appearance ................................................................................................................................ xi

Contents ......................................................................................................................................................... xii

Glossary ......................................................................................................................................................... xviii

SECTION 1 Over View


1.1 Function ............................................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2 Features .............................................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.3 Components ....................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.4 Construction ....................................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.5 System Configuration ........................................................................................................................ 1-6

SECTION 2 Names and Functions


2.1 Function of Operation Panel .............................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2 Function of the Screen ....................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.1 Display Panel ....................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.2 Menu Title Bar .................................................................................................................... 2-10

SECTION 3 Basic Operation


3.1 Menu Operation ............................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.1 How to Select the Menu ...................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball ..................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu ....................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.1.3 How to Use the Shortcut Menu ............................................................................ 3-7
3.1.2 Various Panels ........................................................................................................................ 3-8
3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters ....................................................................................... 3-10
3.1.3.1 Numerical Input .................................................................................................... 3-10
3.1.3.2 Alphabetical Input ................................................................................................ 3-11
3.2 General Flowchart ............................................................................................................................ 3-12
3.2.1 General Flowchart ............................................................................................................... 3-12
3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing ........................................................................................................... 3-13
3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation ...................................................................................................... 3-15
3.3.1 Power ON ([PWR]) ............................................................................................................. 3-15
3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu ................................................................................................. 3-15
3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS Only) ........................................................... 3-16
3.3.4 Power OFF Operation ......................................................................................................... 3-18
3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume ...................................................................... 3-18
3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT]) .................................................................... 3-19
3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]) ..................................................................... 3-19

xii
3.3.8 Adjusting the Radar Image ([RADAR]) ............................................................................. 3-23
3.3.9 Turning the ARPA/AIS Target Display ON/OFF ([ARPA]) ............................................... 3-25
3.3.10 System Restoration in Case of Abnormal Operations ......................................................... 3-30
3.4 Selecting ROUTE and To WP .......................................................................................................... 3-31
3.4.1 Selecting ROUTE and To WP Using the Display Panel ..................................................... 3-31
3.4.2 Selecting ROUTE and To WP from the Menu .................................................................... 3-32
3.5 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only) ....................................................................... 3-34
3.6 Shifting the Chart ............................................................................................................................. 3-36
3.6.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button ........................................................................ 3-36
3.6.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor ............................................................................ 3-36
3.6.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor ............................................................................. 3-37
3.6.4 Shifting the Chart with the [PORT LIST] Button ............................................................... 3-37
3.6.5 Displaying the Chart by Entering the Position .................................................................... 3-39
3.7 Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only) ............................................................................. 3-40
3.7.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band (S-57/C-MAP Only) ............................................. 3-40
3.7.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only) ................................................................................. 3-41
3.7.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only) .......................................................................... 3-42
3.7.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only) ........................................................................... 3-43
3.8 ARCS Chart Display Options (ARCS Only) ................................................................................... 3-44
3.8.1 High Resolution Area Selection (ARCS Only) ................................................................... 3-44
3.8.2 Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS Only) .................................................................... 3-44
3.8.3 Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only) ....................................................................... 3-45
3.8.4 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only) .............................................................................. 3-45
3.8.5 Changing Active Panels ....................................................................................................... 3-46
3.8.6 Loading a Low Resolution Chart (ARCS Only) ................................................................. 3-47
3.8.7 To Selecrt the High Resolution Chart (ARCS Only) .......................................................... 3-47
3.8.8 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only) ................................................................ 3-48
3.8.9 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary Notice (ARCS Only) ........................................... 3-48
3.8.10 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only) .......................................................................................... 3-49
3.9 Selecting a S-57/C-MAP Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only) ..................................................................... 3-51
3.10 Displaying a User Chart ................................................................................................................... 3-52
3.11 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart ................................................................................................. 3-53
3.12 User-Marking/Highlighting ............................................................................................................. 3-54
3.12.1 Marking the Event Mark (EVENT) ..................................................................................... 3-54
3.12.2 Marking the Information Mark ........................................................................................... 3-56
3.12.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark .......................................................................................... 3-57
3.12.4 Highlighting ........................................................................................................................ 3-58
3.13 Reading Out Information of the Objects ([INFO]) .......................................................................... 3-59
3.14 Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide View) ........................................................... 3-61
3.14.1 Multi View Screen ............................................................................................................... 3-61
3.14.2 Selecting an Area ................................................................................................................. 3-62
3.14.3 Wide View Screen ............................................................................................................... 3-62
3.15 Using the Analog Meter ................................................................................................................... 3-63
3.16 Own Ship’s Setting ([Ship] - [Option]) ........................................................................................... 3-64
3.16.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position of Own Ship ...................................................... 3-64
3.16.2 Ship’s Shape ........................................................................................................................ 3-65

xiii
3.16.3 Vector Display and Heading Line at Primary Position ........................................................ 3-66
3.16.4 Danger Detection Vector and Guard Ring ........................................................................... 3-67
3.16.5 Track and Time Label Display ............................................................................................ 3-68
3.16.6 Display and Track of Secondary Position ........................................................................... 3-69
3.16.7 Bearing and Speed Settings ................................................................................................. 3-69
3.17 Operating EBL/VRM ....................................................................................................................... 3-70
3.17.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel ............................................................... 3-70
3.17.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Menu ............................................................................... 3-74
3.17.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option ............................................................................. 3-74
3.17.2.2 1-step Operation ................................................................................................... 3-74
3.17.2.3 2-step Operation ................................................................................................... 3-77
3.18 Running Fix ..................................................................................................................................... 3-80
3.19 EBL Maneuver ................................................................................................................................. 3-81
3.20 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode .................................................................................................... 3-83
3.20.1 Selecting Motion Mode ....................................................................................................... 3-84
3.20.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP Only) ................................................................... 3-85
3.20.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode ....................................................................................................... 3-85
3.21 My Port List ..................................................................................................................................... 3-86
3.21.1 Adding to My Port List ....................................................................................................... 3-86
3.21.2 Deleting My Port List .......................................................................................................... 3-87
3.22 Logbook ........................................................................................................................................... 3-88
3.22.1 Displaying the Logbook ...................................................................................................... 3-88
3.22.2 Setting Logbook Options .................................................................................................... 3-91
3.23 Setting the Chart Options ................................................................................................................. 3-93
3.23.1 Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options .................................................................................. 3-93
3.23.2 Setting Other Chart Options ................................................................................................ 3-106
3.23.3 Setting Scales ...................................................................................................................... 3-106
3.24 Setting the Alarm Options ............................................................................................................... 3-107
3.25 Setting the View Options ................................................................................................................. 3-109
3.25.1 Setting Radar Options ......................................................................................................... 3-109
3.25.2 Setting ARPA/AIS Options ................................................................................................. 3-111
3.25.3 Setting Analog Meter Options ............................................................................................. 3-113
3.25.4 Setting Logbook Options .................................................................................................... 3-113
3.25.5 Clear Voyage Distance ......................................................................................................... 3-113
3.25.6 Setting Date/Time ................................................................................................................ 3-114
3.26 Shifting Own Ship Position ............................................................................................................. 3-115
3.26.1 Shifting Using the Cursor .................................................................................................... 3-115
3.26.2 Shifting by Entering the Position ........................................................................................ 3-116
3.26.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value .................................................................................. 3-116
3.27 Canceling the Ship Offset ................................................................................................................ 3-117
3.28 Printing Out (Only when Connected to a Printer) ........................................................................... 3-117
3.29 Displaying the Startup Menu (Exit the ECDIS) .............................................................................. 3-117

SECTION 4 Route Planning


4.1 Route Planning ................................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.1 Setting the Route Options ................................................................................................... 4-4
4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor ............................................................................... 4-5

xiv
4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode .............................................................................................. 4-5
4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor) ................................... 4-6
4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor ................................................................... 4-9
4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor) ............................................................. 4-11
4.1.2.5 Recalling a Previous Route File (Table Editor) .................................................... 4-20
4.1.2.6 Inporting Route Files ............................................................................................ 4-21
4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files ........................................................................................... 4-22
4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor ........................................................................... 4-23
4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode .......................................................................................... 4-23
4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic Editor) ........................... 4-24
4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor .............................................................. 4-27
4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editor) ......................................................... 4-29
4.1.3.5 Recalling a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor) ................................................ 4-36
4.1.3.6 Inporting Route Files ............................................................................................ 4-37
4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files ........................................................................................... 4-38
4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials ............................................ 4-39
4.2 Creating an Alternate Route ............................................................................................................. 4-42
4.2.1 Operation Flowchart ............................................................................................................ 4-42
4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route ..................................................................................................... 4-43

SECTION 5 Chart Editing


5.1 Chart Edit Mode .............................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2 Menus and Button Functions ........................................................................................................... 5-4
5.2.1 Chart Editing menu ............................................................................................................. 5-4
5.2.2 Button functions .................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.3 Operation Flowchart ........................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.3.1 Flow of User Chart Edit ...................................................................................................... 5-7
5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Charts .................................................................................. 5-9
5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Chart ................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.2.2 Editing a User Chart ............................................................................................. 5-11
5.3.2.3 Merging User Charts ............................................................................................ 5-13
5.3.2.4 Importing User Charts .......................................................................................... 5-14
5.4 Manual Update Operation ................................................................................................................ 5-15
5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update ....................................................................................................... 5-15
5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects ...................................................................... 5-16
5.5 Entering Objects .............................................................................................................................. 5-18
5.5.1 Selecting Object Types ........................................................................................................ 5-20
5.5.2 Entering Objects .................................................................................................................. 5-21
5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update Operation) ............................................. 5-32

SECTION 6 Automatic Sailing


6.1 Automatic Sailing System ............................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.1 Explanation of Automatic Sailing System .......................................................................... 6-2
6.1.2 Route Monitoring and System Alarm .................................................................................. 6-6
6.2 Selecting the Automatic Sailing Type .............................................................................................. 6-7
6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation ........................................................................................................... 6-8
6.3.1 Automatic Sailing Using ANTS Auto ................................................................................. 6-8
6.3.2 Automatic Sailing Using ANTS Manual/Normal ............................................................... 6-10

xv
SECTION 7 Tool Menu/Maintenance Menu
7.1 File Manager .................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 Connection ....................................................................................................................................... 7-5
7.3 Color Pattern (S-57 Only) ................................................................................................................ 7-6
7.4 Color Pattern (ARCS) ...................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.5 Gray Scale ........................................................................................................................................ 7-8

SECTION 8 ChartPortfolio
8.1 Entering/Exiting the Chart Portfolio Mode ..................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Chart Portfolio Main Screen ............................................................................................................ 8-3
8.3 Overview Flowchart ......................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.4 Obtaining an Authorization (S-57 Primar/C-MAP/ARCS) ............................................................. 8-10
8.4.1 Getting Permission (For S-57 Primar) (Currently not available) ........................................ 8-10
8.4.2 Getting Permission (For C-MAP) ....................................................................................... 8-11
8.4.3 Importing/Registering the Chart Permit (ARCS) ................................................................ 8-13
8.4.4 ARCS Chart Permit FD Backup .......................................................................................... 8-13
8.5 Importing/Updating the Source Charts (For S-57/C-MAP/ARCS) ................................................. 8-14
8.5.1 Reading the Source Charts .................................................................................................. 8-14
8.5.2 Importing/Updating Operation ............................................................................................ 8-15
8.6 Editing Operations (For S-57 Primar Online/C-MAP) (Primar is not currently available) ............. 8-17
8.6.1 Selectable Filter ON/OFF Selection (Selectable Filter) ...................................................... 8-17
8.6.2 Selecting all Source Charts (Select All) .............................................................................. 8-17
8.6.3 Deleting the System Chart (Delete) .................................................................................... 8-17
8.7 Filtering the Source Charts (For S-57Primar Online/C-MAP) ........................................................ 8-17
8.8 View Operations .............................................................................................................................. 8-19
8.8.1 Getting Chart Information ([Information]) ......................................................................... 8-19
8.8.2 Viewing the Cell Permit Information (For S-57 Primar) ..................................................... 8-20
8.8.3 Viewing the ARCS License Information (For ARCS) ........................................................ 8-20
8.8.4 Viewing the Version Information of the Chart Portfolio ..................................................... 8-20
8.9 Setting the Options .......................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.9.1 [S-57] Accepting Chart Update ........................................................................................... 8-21
8.9.2 Setting the S-57 Primar Options (Primar is not currently available) ................................... 8-22
8.9.3 Setting the C-MAP Options ................................................................................................ 8-23
8.9.4 Setting the ARCS Options ................................................................................................... 8-24
8.9.5 Setting the Boot Options ..................................................................................................... 8-24
8.9.6 Setting the Advanced Options ............................................................................................. 8-25

SECTION 9 Playback Operation


9.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback Mode ............................................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Playing Back the Logging Data ....................................................................................................... 9-4

SECTION 10 Maintenance and Inspection


10.1 Daily Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 10-3
10.2 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................... 10-3

SECTION 11 Operating Environment

xvi
SECTION 12 After-Sales Service
12.1 When Asking for Service ................................................................................................................. 12-2
12.2 Checks and Inspection ..................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.3 Hardware Monitor............................................................................................................................ 12-3

SECTION 13 Disposal
13.1 Disposal of the Product .................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.2 Disposal of Used Batteries ............................................................................................................... 13-2
13.3 Disposal of LCD Module ................................................................................................................. 13-2

SECTION 14 Specifications
14.1 Bridge Display Terminal .................................................................................................................. 14-2
14.2 Navigation Interface Board .............................................................................................................. 14-2
14.3 Navigation Workstation (Option) ..................................................................................................... 14-3

Appendices
A. Alarm Function ................................................................................................................................ App-2
B. ARCS Security Related Alarm ........................................................................................................ App-6
C. Abbreviation for Geodetic System .................................................................................................. App-7

Index

END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR JAN-901 SERIES ECDIS SOFTWARE

xvii
Glossary
AIS : Automatic Identification System

ANTS : Automatic Navigation & Track-keeping System

ARCS : Admiralty Raster Chart Service

ARPA : Auto RADAR plotting aid

AUTO SAIL : The system automatically navigates to keep the scheduled route. Same as auto-
matic sailing.

C-MAP : Nautical chart in a digital format by C MAP company.

COG : Course over ground

CO. TO STEER : Heading command

DIST. : Distance

DR : Dead reckoning

EBL : Electronic bearing lines

ECDIS : Electronic Chart Display and Information System

ENC : Electronic navigation chart

ETA : Estimated time of arrival

ETD : Estimated time of departure

F.ETA : Final ETA. Estimated time of arrival to the final waypoint.

GC : Great Circle

HDG : Ship’s heading

leg : Line between two consecutive waypoints

LMT : Local mean time

LON : Longitude

RL : Rhumb line

SENC : System Electronic Navigational Chart

SOG : Speed over ground

UTC : Coordinated universal time

xviii
VRM : Variable range markers

WOL : Wheel over line

WOP : Wheel over point

WP : Waypoint

WP-WP : The division of the leg specified by two waypoints. Displays data between two
consecutive waypoints are displayed.

XTD : Cross track distance

xix
1
Over View
1.1 Function
The JAN-901 ECDIS is a high-performance, advanced navigation system having ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display
and Information System) functions. Consequently, JAN-901 can become the core of an integrated navigation sys-
tem (INS) or integrated bridge system (IBS) that supports one-man bridge operation.
• Safe sailing
• Energy-saved sailing

1 Over View 1-2


1.2 Features
The JAN-901 has the following features: 1
• Display of vector charts such as S-57 and C-MAP, and raster charts such as ARCS

• Safe navigation using the crossing alarm function and guard ring function working for safety contours and
dangerous areas

• Optimized displays of navigation warnings, weather warnings, and emergency messages from the connected
Navtex receiver

• Ease of operation supported by high-speed drawing and high-speed processing

• Ease of user chart creation

• Multi view function to display two charts at a time (cannot mix S-57/C-MAP and ARCS)

• Wide range view in addition to single or multi view

• Route planning in two ways, using table editor or graphic editor

• Creation of alternative route during voyage

• Automatic sailing by connecting with autopilot (Normal (manual), ANTS Manual, or ANTS Auto)

• Playback function to check the voyage

• S-57 update portfolio

1-3 1 Over View


1.3 Components
A list of components and optional accessories is shown below.

• Standard Equipments

Name Model Quantity


Display Unit NDC-4225 1
Hood MPOL30308 1
Instruction Manual (English) DC50-JAN-901 1
Instruction Manual (Japanese) DC00-JAN-901 1

• Option

Name Model Quantity


Navigation interface kits MPXP32636 1
Serial input interface kit MPXP32637 1

1 Over View 1-4


1.4 Construction
The outline drawing of the unit is shown below. 1

Mass: Approx. 100 kg Cable Inlet

1-5 1 Over View


1.5 System Configuration

GPS, DGPS, GPS, DGPS,


LORAN-C LORAN-C NAVTEXR GYRO
OR DECCA OR DECCA LOG
ECEIVER COMPASS
NAVIGATOR NAVIGATOR

250V-TTYCS-1
(MAX50m,
NMEA0183CUR.)
250V-TTYCS-1
(MAX50m,NMEA0183CUR.)

250V-TTYCS-1
(MAX15m,RS232C/MAX50m,RS422)

250V-DPYC-1.25(200P/NM)

250V-MPYC-5(STEPSIG.)

RADAR/ARPA Total Navigator RADAR/ARPA


(X BAND) ECDIS (S BAND)

AUTO PILOT

Navigaton
Ineface
Unititr
250V-TTYCS-4
(MAX15m,RS232C/MAX50m,RS422)

H-2695110006 H-2695110006
(MAX10m,RADAR SIG.) (MAX10m,RADAR SIG.)

250V-TTYCS-4 250V-TTYCS-4
(MAX10m,NMEA0183) (MAX10m,NMEA0183)

INTERSWITCH 2095110057(MAX50m)

METEORO-LOGICAL
RUDDER Wind Direction: 250V-MPYC-5(SYNCHRO SIG.) 250V-TTYCS-1
Wind Speed: 250V-DPYCS-1.25(4-20mADC) OR (MAX50m,NMEA0183 CUR.)
250V-MPYCS-5

CONNING
DISPLAY SONAR
250V-TTYCS-4 250V-TTYCS-1
(MAX10m,RS422) (MAX50m,NMEA0183 CUR.)

HULL MOTION ENGINE DATA LOGGER


250V-MRYCS-4(4-20mADC) 250V-TTYCS-1(MAX200m,RS422)

1 Over View 1-6


2
Names
and
Functions
The JAN-901 can be operated using the following sections:
• Operation panel
Consists of keys, dials, lights and the track ball section.
• Display panel (information display area) on the screen
Consists of buttons that will be used frequently and information display. All of the button operations can be
accomplished using the menu.
• Menu
You can access to menus using the [MENU] key on the operation panel or the [MENU] button on the display
panel. The menu trees are listed at the end of this Chapter.

2.1 Function of Operation Panel


Fig. 2.1 shows the operation panel. Table 2.1 describes the name and function of each part on the operation panel.

26 27

1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

25
2

10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

23 24

19 20 21 22

Fig. 2.1 Operation Panel

Table 2.1 Names and Functions

No. Name Function


1 PWR Turns the power on.
2 PWR FAIL Indicates the AC power supply error.
3 ALARM VOL Adjusts the alarm volume in five steps.
4 BRILL Adjusts the screen (LCD) brightness.
5 ECHO*1 Adjust radar echo brightness.
6 RAIN*1 Suppresses rain/snow clutter.
7 SEA*1 Suppresses sea clutter.
8 GAIN*1 Adjusts receiver gain.
9 ZOOM Zooms in on specified chart display areas.

2 Names and Functions 2-2


Table 2.1 Names and Functions -- Continued

No. Name Function


10 RANGE + Range up.

11 MENU
- Range down.
Enters menu mode and open the menu title bar on the top of the screen. 2
12 PANEL Dims the operation panel in four steps.
13 DAY / NIGHT Changes the display color of the screen to suit the lighting conditions of the
bridge.
14 ALARM ACK Press to acknowledge an alarm.
15 INFO Reads the information belonging to each of the objects on electronic charts.
Reading out information of electronic chart
16 MONI / PLAN Not used.
17 RADAR*1 Displays the radar echo on the chart screen.
18 ARPA*1 Displays the ARPA target on the chart screen.
19 EBL1 / EBL2 Turns the Electronic Bearing Line ON/OFF, and operates the Electronic
Bearing Line.
20 F1 - F6 Function keys. (Not used.)
21 DATA A-Z Alphabet keys.
ENTRY CHAR Not used.
CHART Not used.
UPDATE
. Enters the decimal point.
(BS) Back space. Moves the cursor to the left.
Moves the cursor to the right.
0-9 Number keys.
CLR Clear of set data.
ENT Enters set data.
22 VRM1 / VRM2 Turns the Variable Range Marker ON/OFF, and operates the Variable Range
Marker.
23 LEFT Button Left-click button used for selecting the menu and menu options. Also it is
used for carrying out operations on electronic charts.
24 RIGHT Button Right-click button used for opening the shortcut menu on the chart.
25 TRACKBALL Moves the cursor on the screen.
26 AUTO GUARD Used in combination with the [SET CO.] or [AUTO] or [TURN] switches.
SAILING AUTO*2 Starts or stops automatic sailing.
Use this switch in combination with the [GUARD] switch.
TURN*2 Starts turning.
Use this switch in combination with the [GUARD] switch.
SET CO. Not used.
27 JOYSTICK Not used.

*1:Effective only when the optional radar board is installed.


*2:Effective only when the equipment is linked to auto pilot.

2-3 2 Names and Functions


2.2 Function of the Screen
The screen consists of two areas, the chart display area and display panel (information display area). The menu title
bar appears when JAN-901 enters the menu mode.

Menu title bar < MENU


North arrow mark <MENU

Chart display area Display panel

Chart Display Area:


The chart display area displays the electronic chart stored on hard disk. (S-57, C-MAP and/or ARCS charts)
On the chart, the following will be displayed according to your settings:
• Your ship’s symbol and vector at the primary position
• Your ship’s symbol and vector at the secondary position
• Head line
• Primary position track and time label
• Secondary position track
• EBL/VRM markers
• RADAR echo (when the optional radar board is installed)
• Other ship symbols, vectors and ship’s track (when ARPA/AIS is installed)
• etc.
Also, various screen panels will be displayed on electronic charts according to the function in use.

Display Panel:
The display panel displays various navigation information for sailing including alarms. Also, buttons that will be
frequently used for navigation operation are arranged in this panel.

Memo: All of the button functions in the display panel can be accomplished by the menu operation.

Menu Title Bar:


When the [MENU] key on the operation panel is pressed or when the [MENU] button on the display panel is left-
clicked, the menu title bar opens on top of the screen to allow menu operation.
Left-clicking the [MENU] button once again or left-clicking the chart display area will close the menu title bar.

2 Names and Functions 2-4


2.2.1 Display Panel
The contents of display panel will change according to the chart being selected, either S-57/C-MAP or ARCS. The
following shows the typical displays common to S-57/C-MAP and ARCS.
Name of positioning system
Name of primary system position
2
Geodetic system name
[MENU] button used to enter the menu mode.

Date and time of Local Mean Time. ( ) shows the time zone.

Alarm display buttons. Up to 3 alarm names and the number of alarms


are displayed. e.g. ARR (Arrival) To see all alarms, left-click the [Alarm
List] button. You will see the detailed description of each alarm.

Auto sailing status. See “Auto Sailing Status Panel” on page 2-9.

Current primary system position (Latitude/Longitude)

Course and speed of primary (The vector of the vessel’s motion over the
ground.)

Ship’s heading

Log speed (speed through the water)

Course to steer (CTS) (It is displayed during Automatic Sailing.)

Vector time

Route name being selected (“UNLOAD” appears if nothing is selected.


Drop-down list shows all route names.)

Next waypoint being selected (Drop-down list shows the selectable


waypoints manually.)

Information panel for “To WP”, “XTD”, “Destination WP”, “Course”


and “Drift”. See page 2-8.

The contents of this CHART panel differs depending on the chart type.
For S-57/C-MAP, see 2-6. For ARCS, see 2-7.

Displays the system name from which information is received.


RADAR 1 ARPA 1 AISAIS (Automatic Identifica-
tion System)
ARPA 1, ARPA2, or ARPA 1/2
RADAR 1 or RADAR 2

Bearing and distance from own ship

Coordinate of the cursor position (“C” : Cursor)

2-5 2 Names and Functions


(1) CHART Panel
CHART Panel for S-57/C-MAP

When left-clicked, shows the registered port name list. Selected port
name position will be displayed on the chart.

When left-clicked, EVENT mark is put at the own ship position.

SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information level selec-


tion buttons. When the button is lit in green, corresponding SENC is
displayed.
BASE: Shows basic information such as geographic area. (This
is not intended to be sufficient for safe navigation.)
STANDARD: Shows standard information (First selection at power ON).
OTHER: Shows all information.

Scale of the chart being displayed (Drop-down list shows all avail-
able scales.)

Range of the chart being displayed (Drop-down list shows all avail-
able ranges.)

Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)


True: Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches
the predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is auto-
matically shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative: Your ship stays on the screen and the geographic ob-
jects move instead.
Free: Chart is displayed regardless of the ship’s movement.

Azimuth (selectable with the drop-down list button)


North Up: The chart always orients north.
Course Up:Your ship’s heading always faces up on the screen. (The
chart rotates.)
Rotation: You can rotate the chart by the specified amount using
the degree specifying box on this panel.

Rotational degree entry box for Azimuth “Rotation”.

HOME: Displays your ship on the screen.

Zoom Area: You can magnify the specified area using a rubber
band.

Zoom In: You can magnify the range.


Zoom Out: You can reduce the range.

Wide View:You can display additional wide range view in the dis-
play panel area, which makes you easier to see your
ship’s geometric position.

When Fix is clicked (in red), the currently displayed chart is held.

2 Names and Functions 2-6


CHART Panel for ARCS

Note: Function of the [EVENT], [PORT LIST] and [HOME] but-


tons is the same as for S-57/C-MAP.

Displays the geodetic system of the chart.

Displays the original scale of the chart.

Scale of the chart being displayed

Range of the chart being displayed

Motion (selectable with the drop-down list button)


True: Your ship moves on the chart. When the ship reaches
the predetermined limit on the screen, the chart is auto-
matically shifted to keep display the ship.
Relative: Your ship stays at the center of the chart and the geo-
graphic objects move instead.
Free: Chart is displayed regardless of the ship’s movement.

Azimuth: Chart up only

Selects a larger chart.

Selects a smaller chart.

Opens the “Select Chart” panel. You can select the ARCS chart
you want. See, 3.8.4 “Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)”.

2-7 2 Names and Functions


(2) To WP, XTD, Dest WP, Route and Drift Panels
To WP:

Distance from the ship to the next waypoint


Bearing from the ship to the next waypoint
Estimated Time To Go to the next waypoint
Estimated Time of Arrival at the next waypoint
Speed to arrive at the next waypoint by the planned time

XTD :

Track deviation

Cross Track Limit (Port side)

Cross Track Limit (Starboard side)

Dest WP:

Destined waypoint (selectable from the drop-down list)

Distance from the ship to the destined waypoint (not for direct path,
but total sum of the distance of each leg)

Time To Go to the destined waypoint

Estimated Time of Arrival at the destined waypoint

Route:
New course after arrival of the next waypoint
Name of waypoint displayed at “To WP”
Latitude of the next waypoint
Longitude of the next waypoint
Estimated Time of Arrival at the final waypoint
Total sum of distance between the own ship and the starting WP0.

New Course

To WP

Own Ship
[New Course]

2 Names and Functions 2-8


Drift:

Current direction calculated by the difference between the COG


and HDG vectors
2
Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG and
HDG vectors.

(3) Auto Sailing Status Panel


The auto sailing status panel will be displayed as follows:

NAVI: Auto Pilot equipment is NAVI mode


AUTO: Auto Pilot equipment is AUTO mode
HAND: Auto Pilot equipment is HAND mode
OVRD: Auto Pilot equipment is OVRD mode

KEEP: Keep tracking the current leg


DIRECT: Direct route to Waypoint
TURN: Changing the steering
AVOID: Under ship-avoiding operation

MAN: Manual Turning mode


AUTO: Auto Turning mode

NotRDY: Not ready to Auto Sailing


READY: Ready to Auto Sailing
CONV: Conventional (Normal) type Auto Sailing
ANTS: ANTS type Auto Sailing

Note: To use auto sailing feature, the Auto Pilot equipment must be con-
nected.

2-9 2 Names and Functions


2.2.2 Menu Title Bar
When the [MENU] button on the display panel is left-clicked, the menu title bar opens and you can access to
various menus.
[MENU] Button

The following shows the menu trees:

Table 2.2 Menu Tree

Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference


(1) Cursor (1) Scroll 3.6.3, 3.6.2
(2) Zoom Area 3.7.1
(3) High Resolution Area 3.8
(4) EBL1/VRM1(Dashed-Line) (1) Ship-Centered 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(5) EBL2/VRM2(Dash-Dotted-Line) (1) Ship-Centered 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) Floating 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(6) Remove EBL/VRM (1) EBL1/VRM1(Dashed-Line) 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(2) EBL2/VRM2(Dash-Dotted-Line) 3.17.2.2, 3.17.2.3
(7) Running Fix 3.18
(8) Remove Running Fix 3.18
(9) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information 3.13
(1) Other Information 3.13
(2) EBL Maneuver 3.19
(3) Remove EBL Maneuver 3.19
(0) Option... 3.17.2.1
(2) Chart (1) Marking / Highlighting (1) Event-Mark 3.12.1
(2) Information Mark 3.12.2
(3) Tidal Stream Mark 3.12.3
(4) Highlight 3.12.4
(5) Delete Event-Mark... 3.12.1
(2) Off Center (1) Enter Position... 3.6.5
(2) Add to my Port List... 3.21.1
(3) My Port List... 3.6.4, 3.21.2
(4) Home 3.6.1
(3) ARCS (1) Select Chart under Cursor 3.8.3
(2) Select Chart from all... 3.8.4
(3) Change Active Panel 3.8.5
(4) Load Low Resolution 3.8.6
(5) Note and Diagram 3.8.8
(6) Temporary and Preliminary Notice... 3.8.9
(7) Adjust Datum Offset... 3.8.10

2 Names and Functions 2-10


Table 2.2 Menu Tree -- Continued

Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference


(2) Chart (8) Datum Transformation... 3.8.10
(4) Select S-57/C-MAP Chart...
(5) User Charts (1) Select User Chart...
3.9
3.10 2
(2) Chart Editor... 5.1, 5.3.1, 5.3.2.1, 5.3.2.2
(3) Clear User Charts 3.10
(6) Manual Updating... 5.1, 5.4, 5.4.2
(7) Scale (1) Select Scale... 3.7.4
(2) Select Range... 3.7.3
(3) Zoom In 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(4) Zoom Out 3.7.2, 3.8.2
(8) Azimuth (1) North Up 3.20.2
(2) Course Up 3.20.2
(3) Rotation 3.20.2
(9) Motion (1) True 3.20.1
(2) Relative 3.20.1
(3) Free 3.20.1
(1) Fix View 3.20.3
(2) Accept S-57 Updates 3.11
(3) Print... 3.28
(4) Save Screen
(0) Option (1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS... 3.23.1
(2) Other Charts... 3.23.2
(3) Scale... 3.23.3
(3) Ship (1) Adjust (1) Cursor 3.26.1
(2) Enter Position... 3.26.2
(3) Enter Offset... 3.26.3
(4) Clear Offset 3.27
(0) Option... 3.16, 3.16.1 -- 3.16.7
(4) View (1) Day-Night (1) Day Bright 3.3.6
(2) Day Whiteback 3.3.6
(3) Day Blackback 3.3.6
(4) Dusk 3.3.6
(5) Night 3.3.6
(2) Radar (1) Radar 1 3.3.8
(2) Radar 2 3.3.8
(3) Range Rings 3.3.8
(3) ARPA / AIS (1) ARPA1 3.3.9
(2) ARPA2 3.3.9
(3) AIS 3.3.9
(4) ALL 3.3.9
(5) ALL List 3.3.9
(6) Select List 3.3.9
(4) Analog Meter 3.15
(5) Logbook 3.22.1

2-11 2 Names and Functions


Table 2.2 Menu Tree -- Continued

Main Menu Submenu Submenu/Option Reference


(4) View (6) Multi View (1) Single View 3.14.1
(2) Top Bottom 3.14.1
(3) Right Left 3.14.1
(4) Right Top View 3.14.1
(5) Left Top View 3.14.1
(6) Right Bottom View 3.14.1
(7) Left Bottom View 3.14.1
(8) Select Area 3.14.2
(9) Wide Range View 3.14.3
(0) Option (1) Radar... 3.25.1
(2) ARPA/AIS... 3.25.2
(3) Analog Meter... 3.15
(4) Logbook... 3.22.2
(5) Clear Voyage Distance 3.25.5
(6) Date / Time... 3.25.6
(5) Route (1) Select Route... 3.4.2
(2) Clear Route 3.4.2
(3) Select Next WP... 3.4.2
(4) Create Alternate Route 4.2.1, 4.2.2
(5) Planning (1) Table Editor 4.1.2.1, 4.1.2.3 -- 4.1.2.5
(2) Graphic Editor 4.1.3.1, 4.1.3.3 -- 4.1.3.5
(0) Option... 4.1.1
(6) Auto Sail (1) Start... 6.3.1, 6.3.2
(2) Stop 6.3.1, 6.3.2
(3) Start Avoiding... 6.3.2
(4) Stop Avoiding... 6.3.2
(5) Option... 6.2, 6.3.1, 6.3.2
(7) Alarm (1) List... 3.3.7
(2) History... 3.3.7
(0) Option... 3.24
(8) Tool (1) Keyboard
(2) File Manager... 7.1
(3) Chart Portfolio... (1) Create 8.1
(2) Top Window
(4) Navigation Data Graphs...
(9) Maintenance (1) Connection... 7.2
(2) Color Test... 7.3, 7.4
(3) Grey Scale... 7.5
(4) For Engineer
(0) Exit 3.29

2 Names and Functions 2-12


3
Basic
Operation
Precautions:
• Do not put anything on the operation panel. If you put anything hot on it, it may be deformed.
• Do not give any impact on the operation panel, trackball and dials. Otherwise, any failure or damage may result.

Notes on Description:
(1) Keys/Buttons/dials/menu names:
The keys on the operation panel, buttons on the display panel and the menu names are written as [xxxx] in this
book.
Example:
• [MENU] key (on the operation panel)
• [MENU] button (on the display panel)
• [(1) Cursor] (menu name)

(2) Menu operation description:


The sequential operation to access to a menu is written as follows:
“Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.”
• You will learn how to access to a menu later.

Before starting operation, please understand how to operate the menu referring to 3.1 “Menu Operation”.
The flowchart described in 3.2 “General Flowchart” will give you general procedure for JAN-901.

3 Basic Operation 3-2


3.1 Menu Operation
To operate JAN-901, it is necessary to know how to select menus and set options in the menus.
Basic procedure to access to a menu and set options using the trackball section are described here. Also, major
panel (dialog box, etc.) types that will appear during operation, and how to enter numbers and letters are described.

3.1.1 How to Select the Menu


3.1.1.1 How to Use the Trackball 3
Trackball section on the operation panel
Trackball:
Trackball The trackball is used to move the cursor on the screen
(Moves the cursor.) for position designation, selection of buttons on the dis-
play panel, menu designation, etc.

Left button:
Left button
Right button Used for fixing and selecting a position on the chart, or
(Left-click)
(Right-click) selecting a button, menus and options on the screen.
Pressing the left button is written as “left-click” in this
book.

Right button (Shortcut menu selection button):


Used for displaying a shortcut menu on the screen.
Pressing the right button is written as “right-click” in
this book.

Major cursors
Cross Cursor Hand Cursor
Indicates the position on the chart. Appears when the cursor is moved while
pressing and holding down the left but-
ton in the chart area. You can grip and
Arrow Cursor (Pointer) move the chart freely.
Indicates the position on the display panel,
menu title bar and panel (dialogue box, etc.) Box Cursor
Indicates the position on the chart when
Lens Cursor you are using the user chart, for ex-
Appears when area zoom function is se- ample.
lected. The rubber band can be drawn to
magnify an area.

3-3 3 Basic Operation


3.1.1.2 How to Select the Menu
As for example, the following menu operation is described here.
“Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.”
The general menu selection procedure is as follows:
(1) Opening the menu (entering Menu mode)
(2) Selecting the menu
(3) Selecting the submenu/options

(1) Opening the menu


You can open the menu in two ways.
• Press the [MENU] key on the operation panel. MENU
or or
• Left-click the [MENU] button on the display panel of the screen as follows:

The menu title bar appears on the upper part of the screen.

[Menu Title Bar]

Step-by-step operation to press the [MENU] button on the display panel:


1) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the [MENU] button.
2) Left-click the left button on the trackball section to select the [MENU] button.
Then the menu title bar will open.

Explained as “Left-click the [MENU] button”.

The menu title bar opens.

How to close the menu:


Left-click the [MENU] button on the display panel or left-click at any position on the chart.

3 Basic Operation 3-4


(2) Selecting [(2) Chart] ([MENU] - [(2) Chart])
Select the [(2) Chart] on the menu title bar.
The Chart menu will open.

Step-by-step operation to select [(2) Chart] menu:


1) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to [(2) Chart] on the menu title bar.
2) Left-click the left button on the trackball section to select the [(2) Chart] menu.
Then, the [(2) Chart] menu will open.

Explained as “Left-click [(2) Chart]”.

The [(2) Chart] menu opens.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○

Direct Access to the Submenu/Options by pressing the number buttons


The menu uses a numbering system and each menu has its own number, such as [(2) Chart].
You can directly access to a certain menu by pressing the number buttons on the operation panel sequentially, after
entering the menu mode. (The menu trees with the number is listed in 2.2.2 “Menu Title Bar”.)
For example, to access to [(2) Information Mark] ([MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Infor-
mation Mark]), you can follow the next steps:
1) Press the [MENU] button on the operation panel or left-click the [MENU] button on the display panel.
2) Press the number keys on the operation panel in the following orders:

Direct access operation

MENU or 2 1 2
[(2) Chart] [(2) Information Mark]
[(1) Marking/Highlighting]

3-5 3 Basic Operation


(3) Selecting [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark]
1) Left-click [(1) Marking/Highlighting] on the Chart menu.
Then, the Marking/Highlighting submenu will open.
2) Left-click [(2) Information Mark].
Then, the “Location/Attribute” panel will open.

Shifting the cursor


will also open the
submenu.

How to Close the Panel:


Left-click the [OK] button or [Cancel] button.
[OK]: Enables settings in the panel and close the panel.
[Cancel]: Close the panel without changing the contents of the panel.

3 Basic Operation 3-6


3.1.1.3 How to Use the Shortcut Menu
You may use the shortcut menu by pressing the right button (by right-clicking).

Example 1: By right-clicking on the chart display

Right-clicking the chart may open a short-


cut menu.

Left-click a menu item you want.


3
e.g. “Zoom In”.

Example 2: By right-clicking on the chart display while performing operation

Right-clicking on the chart may open a shortcut menu.

Left-click “Abort” to abort the current operation step.

3-7 3 Basic Operation


3.1.2 Various Panels
The major panel types that will appear on the screen and how to operate them are described here.

Value entry box


You can enter numbers.
1) First, left-click the arrow mark or the entry box.
2) Next, enter the value.
3) To fix the entry, select other value entry box, if
any, or the [ENT] key.

Drop-down list
1) Left-click the button to open the drop-
down list.
2) Left-click an item you want from the list.

Text box
You can enter numbers and letters.
How to enter, see 3.1.3 “How to Enter Numbers and Letters”.

3 Basic Operation 3-8


Tabs
You can display one of panels by selecting a tab.
1) Left-click one of tabs to display a panel.

Check box
Left-click the item to turn it ON or 3
OFF.
The check mark ( ✔ ) shows that the
selected item is set to ON.

Option button (Radio button)


You can select one of items you want.
Left-click one of items to turn it ON.
(Other items are automatically tuned
OFF.) The check mark (✔ ) shows the
selected item.

List box
You can select any item in the list.
Left-click the item to turn it ON or OFF.
The check mark ( ✔ ) shows that the selected item is set to
ON.

To scroll up/down the list:


• Left-click the [UP]/[DOWN] button, or
• While left-clicking the scroll bar, move the trackball so
that it moves upward or downward.
The scroll bar will be located on the right side or at the
bottom of the panel.

Command buttons
Left-click the button to perform the button function.

3-9 3 Basic Operation


3.1.3 How to Enter Numbers and Letters
You can enter numbers and letters into the value entry box or text box using the alphanumeric keys on the operation
panel.

3.1.3.1 Numerical Input

This arrow mark shows the entry box.

Procedure to enter value:


1) Left-click the arrow mark or the value entry box.
35˚34.998’N
Black underlines
Red underline

2) To change the value with the red underline, press the numeric keys on the operation panel.
Then, the red underline moves to the next value.
For example, press [3] and then [3].
33˚34.998’N
Black underline
Red underline
Black underline

3) To change the value with the red underline, press the numeric keys on the operation panel.
Then, the red underline moves to the next value.
For example, press [4] and then [5].
33˚45.998’N
Red underline
Black underline
Black underline

4) Change the value “998” in the same way.


5) To fix the entry, left-click the other value entry box, if any, or left-click the [OK] button.

How to switch between “N (North)” and “S (South)”:


Entering the letter “N” and “S” changes the direction.
• The same procedure applies to “E (East)” and “W (West)”.

3 Basic Operation 3-10


3.1.3.2 Alphabetical Input
The following is the general rule of letter entry:
• One letter key has two more hidden letters. Therefore, to access to the hidden letter, you will need to press
the same key two or three times.
Example for [MNO] key:
• Pressing the [MNO] key once enters the letter “m”.
• Pressing the [MNO] key twice enters the hidden letter “n”.
• Pressing the [MNO] key three times enters the hidden letter “o”. 3
• When you enter a capital letter, press the letter key while pressing the [GUARD] key.
Example for [MNO] key:
To enter “M”, while pressing the [GUARD] key, press the [MNO] key.
• When you input the same group letter successively like “mm” or “mo”, press the [ ] key after entering
the first letter. Then, the next letter can be entered using the same key.
Example for “mn” entry:
Press the [MNO] key for “m”. Then, press the [ ] key and then the [MNO] key twice for “n”.

Procedure to enter letters “Note1” as an example:

Text box

1) Left-click the arrow mark or left-click the inside of the text box. Then, the cursor appears in the box.
2) While pressing and holding the [GUARD] key, press the [MNO] key twice to enter “N”.

N Cursor for letter entry


3) Press the [ ] key and then press the [MNO] key three times to enter “o”.
No
4) Press the [STU] key twice to enter “t”.
Not
5) Press the [DEF] key twice to enter “e”.
Νote
6) Press the [1] key and then press the [ENT] key to fix the entry.
Νote1

Editing the entry:


• If you entered “Nott” by mistake, while pressing and holding the [GUARD] key, press the [BS ].
The last entry “t” is deleted. Each time you press the [BS ] key, the last letter will be deleted.
• If you entered “Notte” by mistake, insert the cursor between “t”s by moving the trackball and then left-
click there.
• Then, while pressing and holding the [GUARD] key, press the [BS ] to delete the first “t”, or
• Press the [CLR] key to delete the second “t”.
Each time you press the [CLR] key, the letter next to the cursor will be deleted.

3-11 3 Basic Operation


3.2 General Flowchart
The following shows a general flowchart to use JAN-901 and the flowchart for sailing.

[Startup Menu]
3.2.1 General Flowchart
[Startup Screen] The Startup Screen will be au-
Power switch ON ECDIS tomatically displayed if
[ECDIS] is left-clicked or no
Startup Menu operation is conducted for 10
selection seconds.
Chart Portfolio

Input ARCS PIN


(ARCS only)
Playback

Startup Screen

[ECDIS Main Screen] [MENU] button


Main Screen

Adjustments
• Screen brightness Display panel
• Operation panel brightness
(Information
• Sound volume
• Radar echo, etc. display area)

(For detailed description,


see 3.2.2 “Flowchart for
Sailing Sailing”.)
Chart display area

(From the menu )


ROUTE selection
WP selection Operation panel
Rout Planning
operation
• Table editing
• Graphical editing

Display panel
Sailing monitoring operation User chart making/
• Alarm monitor editing
(Arrival, Route, etc.) [MENU]
Menu operation
Chart Portfolio
(S-57 chart updating)

Create alternate
route

Exit and shutdown Press the [PWR] key.

Power switch OFF

3 Basic Operation 3-12


3.2.2 Flowchart for Sailing
Sailing start
Alarms:
If an alarm occurs, the alarm panel will blink in red and a sound will be heard.
Check the alarm contents and, after confirming it, press the [ALARM ACK]
key on the operation panel. Pressing the [Alarm List] button on the display
panel shows the alarm contents. (For detailed description, see 3.3.7 “How to
Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK]”).)
3
• Select a route name you want from the display panel. (Initially "UNLOAD" is
Select ROUTE shown.)

Select To WP • Select the To WP (for example “1” or “AUTO SELECT”).

Move you ship to the sea • Move your ship manually. Your ship will always be displayed on the chart.

Note: Be sure that the background color is not


sky blue. If it is sky blue, your ship posi-
tion is shifted by the offset function. In
this case, return its color to gray. See, 3.27
“Canceling the Ship Offset”.

Ship's bearing

Bearing to the To WP

Your ship's symbol

To WP

About Auto Sailing:


You can use automatic sailing when using together with an Auto Pilot equipment. For details, see 6 “Automatic
Sailing”.

3-13 3 Basic Operation


Flowchart for Sailing -- Continued

• When the ship crosses a waypoint boundary, there will be an updated “next
Route monitoring
WP,” and an “ARR (arrival)” alarm occurs. After confirming the alarm con-
("ARR (Arrival)" occurs
when arrived at the WP.) tents, press the [ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel or the alarm but-
ton on the display panel to stop the alarm.
It repeats itself until the
ship arrives at the last WP
before the final destina-
tion.

When the ship exceeds the boundary of the final destination , "ROUTE" alarm
Arrived at the final destination
will occur. After confirming the alarm contents, press the [ALARM ACK] key
("ROUTE" alarm occurs.)
on the operation panel or the alarm button on the display panel to stop the alarm.

Select "UNLOAD". Then the route selected disappears from the screen.
Unload the route

End of sailing

3 Basic Operation 3-14


3.3 Power ON/OFF and Preparation
How to turn the power ON and OFF and preparation before sailing are described here. Note that, when you turn the
power OFF, you must terminate the system by following the termination sequence described here.
Also, how to recover the system in case of hung up is explained.

3.3.1 Power ON ([PWR])


Press the [PWR] key on the operation panel. 3
The power turns on, and the Startup menu will appear after a short while.

[PWR] key

3.3.2 Selecting the Startup Menu


The power turns on, and the Startup menu as shown below will appear after a short while.
You can select one of items.
• ECDIS
Usually, this menu item should be left-clicked. If no menu item is selected, this item will be automatically
selected. When this occurs, the [Startup screen] will first appear, and then the ECDIS screen will be displayed.
• Chart Portfolio
You can update the S-57 chart. Left-clicking this menu will open the chart portfolio main screen. (See 8 “Chart
Portfolio”.)
• Playback
You can play back the sailing you have made. Left-clicking this menu will open the playback main screen. (See
9 “Playback Operation”.)

Note: If no menu item is selected within about 10 seconds, the [Startup screen] appears automatically.

Navigation
E Planning

C Chart Portforio

P Playback

[Startup Menu]

3-15 3 Basic Operation


3.3.3 Startup Screen and ARCS PIN Input (ARCS Only)

1) If ARCS has been installed, the “ARCS PIN” panel will be displayed after [ECDIS] is selected in the
Startup menu. Input the ARCS PIN and left-click on the [OK] button. The [Startup screen] will be
displayed if the inputted ARCS PIN is correct and the [OK] button is left-clicked on the “ARCS PIN”
panel, or if the [Cancel] button has been left-clicked. If ARCS has not been installed, however, the “ARCS
PIN” panel will not be displayed. The [Startup screen] will be displayed instead.

Note: ARCS will not be displayed unless a correct ARCS PIN is inputted on the “ARCS PIN” panel.
ARCS will not be displayed if the [Cancel] button is left-clicked on the “ARCS PIN” panel.

Note: Be sure to carefully read the caution displayed on the startup screen.

[Startup Screen]
3 Basic Operation 3-16
2) After the Startup screen appears, the ECDIS screen will be displayed after a short while.

[ECDIS Screen (Example)]

3-17 3 Basic Operation


3.3.4 Power OFF Operation
Press the [PWR] key on the operation panel.
Then, the power is turned OFF.

[PWR] key

3.3.5 Adjusting the Brightness and Sound Volume


Perform the following adjustments as required.

(1) Brightness of the screen ([BRILL])


Adjust the [BRILL] dial on the operation panel to adjust the brightness on the screen.

(2) Brightness of the operation panel ([PANEL])


Press the [PANEL] key on the operation panel to adjust the brightness on the operation panel. Each time you
press the key, the brightness changes. You can adjust it in five steps.

(3) Sound volume ([ALARM VOL])


Press the [ALARM VOL] key on the operation panel to adjust the alarm sound volume. Each time you press
the key, the sound volume changes. You can adjust it in seven steps.

[ALARM VOL] key [BRILL] dial

[PANEL] key

3 Basic Operation 3-18


3.3.6 Changing the Display Color ([DAY/NIGHT])
You can change the display color to obtain optimum display matched with the lighting conditions on the bridge.
Select one of the following display colors
• Day Bright
• Day Whiteback (For S-57/C-MAP only)
• Day Blackback
• Dusk (For S-57/C-MAP only)
• Night
3
Key operation:
1) Press the [DAY/NIGHT] key on the operation panel.
Each time you press the key, the display color changes.

Menu operation:
1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(1) Day-Night] in that order, and then select one of items you want.
The ✔ mark will be attached to the selected item.
In the following screen, [(1) Day Bright] is selected.

When you select one of items, the menu closes and the display color of the screen will be changed.

Note: When you change display colors, note that a [Night] color especially can make displayed information
difficult to read/see.

3.3.7 How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])


When an alarm occurs, a buzzer sound and the alarm button on the display panel blinks to notify the operator of an
alarm. To notify the alarm, three alarm buttons and the [Alarm List] button are used. The three buttons are used to
display the abbreviated name of the alarm. While the [Alarm List] button is used to open the Alarm panel to see the
details of the alarm. Press the [ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel or left-click the alarm button on the
display panel to stop the alarm.
You can also display the history of alarms using the menu operation.

Caution: Do not stop the alarm unless you confirmed its cause.

Memo: For alarm settings, see 3.24 “Setting the Alarm Options”.

(1) When no alarm is found


If no alarm is found, only the [Alarm List] button is displayed and the button lights in green.

Nothing is displayed here.

Lights in green.

3-19 3 Basic Operation


(2) When an alarm occurs
The alarm and the [Alarm List] button blink in red and an alarm sounds.

Up to three alarms can be displayed here.


Blinks in red.

Shows the number of alarms.

(3) Stopping the blinking alarm


1) Confirm what kind of alarm has occurred, and then press the [ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel.
The blinking alarm will stay lit.
• Left-clicking the alarm button (e.g. [ARR]) on the display panel will also stop the alarm.
To confirm the alarm contents, see (4) “Opening the alarm list” below.

ALARM
Blinks in red. Blinks in red. ACK Stays lit in red. Stays lit in red.
or
Left-click the alarm
button (e.g. [ARR])
Example:
If an XTE (Cross Track Error) occurs, the XTE alarm occurs and the [XTE] button blinks in red.
Blinking stops when you press the [ALARM ACK] key on the operation panel or when you left-click the
[XTE] button on the display panel, and the [XTE] button stays in red.
When the ship enters the acceptable range, the [XTE] alarm is released and the alarm name “XTE” disap-
pears from the button. Also, if the ship enters the acceptable range during blinking the alarm, the alarm is
released.

Note: The alarm lit or blining in red disappears only when the alarm cause is removed.

2) If two or more alarms have occurred, confirm the alarms and press the [ALARM ACK] key on the opera-
tion panel repeatedly until all alarms stop.
• Left-clicking the alarm button repeatedly will also stop the alarms.
To stop the blinking alarms, you can repeatedly left-click the left-most alarm button. (As you press the
left-most alarm button, the alarm not yet stopped will shift to the left for easy alarm stopping operation.)

(4) Opening the alarm list


1) At any time, left-click the [Alarm List] button on the display panel.
Then, the “Alarm List” panel opens.
• If you open the “Alarm List” panel when the alarm blinks, the alarm button in the “Alarm List” also
blinks.
After confirmation, you can stop the blinking alarm by left-clicking the alarm button in the “Alarm
List”. The color of the left-clicked button stays lit in red.

You can also open the “Alarm List” panel from the menu:
• Select [MENU] - [(7) Alarm] - [(1) List] in that order.
The “Alarm List” panel opens. (See the next page.)
2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the “Alarm List” panel.

3 Basic Operation 3-20


3

Button in green: No alarm.

Button in gray (inactive button):


The alarm does not occur in the current system configuration.

Button blinks in red:


The alarm occurs and it is not acknowledged yet.
Button stays in red:
The alarm is acknowledged but it is continuing.
Button changes to green when the alarm cause is removed.

3-21 3 Basic Operation


(5) Displaying the alarm history table
You can display the alarm history on the sailing.

Note: The alarm list will be cleared when the unit is turned OFF. To see the past alarm lists, see 3.22.1
“Displaying the Logbook”.

Menu operation:
1) Select [MENU] - [(7) Alarm] - [(2) History] in that order.
Then, the “Alarm History” panel opens.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the “Alarm History” panel.

• Alarm: Alarm category


• Message: Detailed description of the alarm
• Date/Time: Date when the alarm is acknowledged
• Acknowledge: Date when the alarm is checked
• Delete: Date when the causes of the alarms are removed

3 Basic Operation 3-22


3.3.8 Adjusting the Radar Image ([RADAR])
You can turn ON/OFF the radar image on the chart. The radar image can be adjusted with the dials on the operation
panel.

Note: To display a radar image, the optional rader board must be installed on the unit. Also, a radar image must
be sent from the radar system.

Memo: For Radar settings, see 3.25.1 “Setting Radar Options”.


3
(1) Radar display ON/OFF using the operation panel
Press the [RADAR] key on the operation panel.
The image sent from the radar currently selected will be superimposed on the chart.

RADAR

(2) Radar display ON/OFF from the menu


Turning ON/OFF the Radar 1:
1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(2) Radar] - [(1) Radar 1] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(1) Radar 1], the Radar 1 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the ✔ mark is attached to the [(1) Radar 1].

The menu is closed and the image from the Radar 1 will be superimposed on the chart.

Turning ON/OFF the Radar 2:


1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(2) Radar] - [(2) Radar 2] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(2) Radar 2], the Radar 2 display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the ✔ mark is attached to the [(2) Radar 2].
The image from the Radar 2 will be superimposed on the chart.

Turning ON/OFF the Range Rings:


1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(2) Radar] - [(3) Range Rings] in that order.
Each time you left-click [(3) Range Rings], the range ring display is turned ON and OFF.
When it is turned ON, the ✔ mark is attached to the [(3) Range Rings].
The range rings will be superimposed on the chart.

3-23 3 Basic Operation


(3) Radar image adjustment (on the operation panel)

Note: If menu panel adjustment ([(4) View] -[(0) Option] - [(1) Radar] “Rader Option” panel) is selected,
the following dials do not work. In this case, change the menu setting to activate the dials. For
details, see 3.25.1 “Setting Radar Options”.

[GAIN]: Adjusting sensitivity


The [GAIN] dial adjusts the reception sensitivity of RADAR echo. Turning the [GAIN] dial to the right
increases the reception sensitivity and widens the distances in which RADAR echo can be observed.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial, as reception noise on screen increases. This worsens the contrast and
makes it more difficult to tell the difference between targets and RADAR echo.
Alternatively, turning the [GAIN] dial to the left to view near distances or screens containing closely packed
targets, decreases the reception sensitivity making targets easier to view.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you maybe miss small targets.

[ECHO]: Adjusting RADAR echo brightness


The [ECHO] dial adjusts the brightness of RADAR echo. Turning the [ECHO] dial to the right increases the
brightness of RADAR echo. Adjust this dial for maximum ease of viewing.

[SEA]: Suppressing sea clutter


The [SEA] dial lowers the reception sensitivity in near distances to reduce sea clutter. Turning the [SEA] dial
(ANTI-CLUTTER SEA dial) to the right increases the effect of suppressing sea clutter.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets like buoys and small boats.

[RAIN]: Suppressing rain and snow clutter


The [RAIN] dial suppresses clutter caused by rain and snow. Turning the [RAIN] dial (ANTI-CLUTTER
RAIN dial) to the right enhances the contours of targets that are hidden in images of rain and snow.
Take care not to over-adjust this dial. Otherwise, you may miss small targets. This dial also reduces sea clutter.
So, using both the [RAIN] and [SEA] dials is more effective. Normally, keep this dial turned as far as possible
to the left.

3 Basic Operation 3-24


3.3.9 Turning the ARPA/AIS Target Display ON/OFF ([ARPA])
You can turn ON/OFF the ARPA/AIS target information on the chart using the operation panel or from the menu.

Notes:
• ARPA information is displayed only when it is received from the ARPA radar system.
• AIS information can be displayed only when it is received from the AIS receiver.

• For ARPA/AIS target settings, see 3.25.2 “Setting ARPA/AIS Options”.


3
(1) ARPA/AIS display ON/OFF using the operation panel
Press the [ARPA] key on the operation panel.
The target information sent from the radar currently selected will be superimposed on the chart.

ARPA

(2) ARPA/AIS display ON/OFF from the menu


ARPA 1, ARPA 2 and AIS can be independently selected. Selecting “ALL” can turns ON and OFF ARPA 1,
ARPA 2 and AIS displays at the same time.

1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(1) ARPA 1], - [(2) ARPA 2], - [(3) AIS], or - [(4) ALL]
in that order.
Each time you select [(1) ARPA 1], [(2) ARPA 2], or [(3) AIS], its display is turned ON and OFF.
When you select [(4) ALL], items [(1) ARPA 1], [(2) ARPA 2], and [(3) AIS] are simultaneously turned
ON and OFF.
When the selected item is turned ON, the ✔ mark is attached.

3-25 3 Basic Operation


(3) Opening the ARPA/AIS list
Note that the items “Bearing”, “Distance”, “CPA” and “TCPA” in the table are the filtered value by the
ARPA/AIS option settings. See 3.25.2 “Setting ARPA/AIS Options”.

1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(5) ALL List] in that order.
The “ARPA/AIS List” panel opens.
2) Perform the following operation.
• Left-click one of the tabs, to open the “ARPA - Port”, “ARPA-Starboard”, or “AIS” list.
When you opened “AIS” panel, the [View AIS Detail] button becomes active.
• Left-click the [Close] button to close the “ARPA/AIS List” panel.

List items:
The items are the same for ARPA-Port, ARPA-Starboard and AIS. The P1, P2, etc. are the target number.
• Bearing: Bearing to the ARPA/AIS target
• Distance: Distance to the ARPA/AIS target
• Heading: Heading of the ARPA/AIS target
• Course: Course of the ARPA/AIS target
• Speed: Speed of the ARPA/AIS target
• Position of the ARPA/AIS target
• CPA (Closest Point of Approach)
• TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach)

3 Basic Operation 3-26


[View AIS Detail] button function:
You can view the detailed information on AIS.
When you left-click this button, the “AIS Information” panel will open.

• Left-click the [Close] button to close the “AIS Information” panel.


- Ship’s Name: Name of the AIS target ship
- MMSI: 9-digit unique user ID
- Status: Status of the AIS target
Inactive
Active
Lost
- Nav. Status: Navigation status of the AIS target
0: UNDER WAY USING ENGINE: Under way
1: AT ANCHOR: Anchoring
2: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
3. RESTRICTED MANOEUVRABILITY: Steering capabilities are limited
4: CONSTRAINED BY HER DRAUGHT: Draft is limited
5: MOORED: Mooring
6: AGROUND: Grounding
7: ENGAGED IN FISHING: Fishing
8: UNDER WAY SAILING: Sailing
9: RESERVED FOR HSC: High-speed craft
10: RESERVED FOR WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
15: NOT DEFINED: Undefined
- Call Sign: Call sign on the own station (up to 7 characters)
- IMO No.: 9-digit number
- CPA: Closest point of approach to the AIS target
- TCPA: Time to closest point of approach to the AIS target
- Position Sensor: Types of sensors the AIS target uses
0: Undefined
1: GPS: GPS
2: GLONASS: GLONASS
3: Combined GPS/GLONASS: GPS/GLONASS combined type
4: Loran-C: Loran-C
5: Chayka: Chayka
6: Integrated Navigation System: Integrated Navigation System

3-27 3 Basic Operation


7: Surveyed: Measuring type
8-15: Not used: Not used
- Position Accuracy: 0: Low, 1: High
- Bearing: Bearing from own ship to the AIS target
- Distance: Distance between own ship and the AIS target
- Latitude: The latitude at which the AIS target is situated
- Longitude: The longitude at which the AIS target is situated
- Course: Bearing of the AIS target
- Speed: Speed of the AIS target
- Ship’s Type: Types of AIS target
2X: WIG: Wing-in-ground effect craft
30: FISHING VESSEL: Fishing vessel
31: TOWING VESSEL: Towing vessel
32: TOWING VESSEL-L > 200M B -> 25M: A towing vessel having a length of 200m or longer, or a
width of 25m or longer
33: DREDGE OR UNDERWATER OPE (Engaged in dredging or underwater operation): A vessel that
is dredging or conducting underwater operations
34: VESSEL-DIVING OPE (Engaged in diving operation): A vessel conducting underwater operations
35: VESSEL-MILITARY OPE (Engaged in military operation): A vessel being engaged in military operations
36: SAILING VESSEL: Sailing vessel
37: PLEASURE CRAFT: Pleasure craft
4X: HSC (High speed craft): High-speed craft
50: PILOT VESSEL: Pilot vessel
51: SEARCH AND RESCUE VESSELS: Salvage vessel
52: TUGS: Tugboat
53: PORT TENDERS: Tender boat
54: WITH ANTI-POLLUTION EQUIP (Vessels with anti-pollution facilities or equipment): Clean-up vessel
55: LAW ENFORCEMENT VESSELS: Patrol vessel
58: MEDICAL TRANSPORTS: Medical vessel
59: RESOLUTION NO18: MOB-83 (Ships according to Resolution No18 (Mob-83)): Vessels defined
by the Radio Regulation
6X: PASSENGER SHIPS: Passenger ship
7X: CARGO SHIPS: Cargo ship
8X: TANKER: Tanker
9X: OTHER TYPE OF SHIP: Other types of ships

For categories 2X, 4X, 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates types of loaded cargoes/status.
X1: CATEGORY A (DG/HP/MP)
X2: CATEGORY B (DG/HP/MP)
X3: CATEGORY C (DG/HP/MP)
X4: CATEGORY D (DG/HP/MP)
X9: NO ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
X0: ALL SHIPS OF THIS TYPE

For categories 6X, 7X, 8X, and 9X, the second digit indicates a vessel status.
X5: NOT UNDER COMMAND: Not under command
X6: RESTRICTED BY (her ability) MANOEUVRE: Steering capabilities are limited
X7: CONSTRAINED BY (her) DRAUGHT: Draft is limited
- Length: Length of the AIS target
- Beam: Beam of the AIS target
- Draft: Draft of the AIS target
- Heading: Heading of the AIS target
- Rate of Turn: Turning speed of the AIS target
- Destination: Destination of the AIS target

3 Basic Operation 3-28


(4) Panel Display of ARPA/AIS Target
Left-click on the ARPA/AIS target displayed on the screen so that ARPA/AIS information will be displayed
on the “Selected Target” panel.

1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(1) Other Information] in that order.


The cross cursor becomes the box cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the ARPA/AIS target, and then left-click.
The “Selected Target” panel will open and ARPA/AIS target information will be displayed. If you wish to 3
have the “Selected Target” panel open in advance, select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(3) ARPA/AIS] - [(6)
Select List] in that order.

• Up to 3 targets can be simultaneously displayed on the “Selected Target” panel. The target that was
selected first is displayed in the top panel. As new targets are selected and displayed, previous targets
move down by one. When the fourth target is selected, the bottom target display panel will no longer
display the first target selection.
• To delete a panel display, left-click on the [Release] button provided in each panel. If there is a panel
below the deleted panel, it moves up by one.

Target ID:
Name of the ARPA/AIS target

Bearing:
Bearing towards the ARPA/AIS target

Distance:
Distance to the ARPA/AIS target

Course:
Course to the ARPA/AIS target

Speed:
[Additional] tab Speed of the ARPA/AIS target
[Common] tab
CPA:
Closest point of approach to the
AIS target

TCPA:
Time to closest point of ap-
proach to the AIS target

[AIS Detail] button: Name:


When a panel is displaying AIS Name of the AIS target (not dis-
target information, the "AIS In- played for ARPA targets)
formation" panel will also be
displayed (see the previous Position:
page for AIS "detailed informa- Current position of the ARPA/
tion"). AIS target

Status:
[Release] button: Current status of the ARPA/AIS
Release the selected target. target

3-29 3 Basic Operation


3.3.10 System Restoration in Case of Abnormal Operations
Press the [PWR] key on the operation panel. If the power does not turn off, then hold it down for approximately 10
seconds to turn it off.

[PWR] key

After a while, press the [PWR] key on the operation panel to turn ON the system again.

3 Basic Operation 3-30


3.4 Selecting ROUTE and To WP
When you start sailing, select the ROUTE and To WP as follows: Note that the route file extension shows the route
type. More specifically, the extension “.rtn” is used for Normal type and “.rta” is used for ANTS type.

3.4.1 Selecting ROUTE and To WP Using the Display Panel


(1) Selecting the route using the display panel
1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the ROUTE list. 3
2) Left-click the route name you want in the drop-down list.
When you select the route name, it is read from hard disk and the route image is displayed on the chart.
• Initially “UNLOAD” is shown in the ROUTE list.

Deleting the route:


To delete the route being selected from the chart, left-click the drop-down list button to open the ROUTE list,
and then left-click “UNLOAD”.
• The route disappears from the chart.

Notes: If the scheduled route is on floppy disk or on the navigation workstation, you can copy it to hard
disk using the File Manager. See 7.1 “File Manager”.

(2) Selecting waypoint using the display panel


As you sail, the waypoint number that the ship is currently heading to is displayed.
There are two ways, automatic and manual, for selecting the waypoint number.

Automatic selection (Auto Select):


The waypoint nearest the current position becomes the next waypoint. When your ship passes this waypoint,
the waypoint is automatically updated to the next waypoint.

1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WP list.


2) Left-click the “AUTO SELECT”.

3-31 3 Basic Operation


Manual selection:
To select any waypoint, manually select the waypoint.

1) Left-click the drop-down list button to open the To WP list.


2) Left-click any waypoint number.
For example, when you start from the beginning of the selected
route, left-click “1” in the “To WP” drop-down list.

3.4.2 Selecting ROUTE and To WP from the Menu


(1) Selecting the route from the menu
1) Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(1) Select Route] in that order. The “Select Route” panel opens.

2) Select the route by left-clicking it, and then left-click the [OK] button. Then, the selected route is dis-
played on the chart. Name of this route is displayed on the “ROUTE” panel of the display panel.
• Left-clicking the [Display WP List] button will open the “Select Next WP” panel. For this panel opera-
tion, see the next page.

To delete the route:


1) Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(2) Clear Route] in that order.
Then, the route disappears from the chart and the “ROUTE” panel displays “UNLOAD”.
You can also delete the route by selecting “UNLOAD” in the “ROUTE” panel.

3 Basic Operation 3-32


(2) Selecting the waypoint from the menu
1) Select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(3) Select Next WP] in that order.
The “Select Next WP” panel opens.

2) Select the WP you want by left-clicking it, and then left-click the [OK] button. Then, the selected WP is
displayed on the “To WP” panel of the display panel.

3-33 3 Basic Operation


3.5 Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)
SENC (System Electronic Navigation Chart) information available for display is subdivided into three object cat-
egories, display base, standard display, and all other information. You can change the object category using the
display panel.
Display Base: Important objects that cannot be deleted from the charts, such as coastline and own ship’s safety
contour.
Standard Display: Objects less important than display base, such as drying line, indication of fixed and floating
aids to navigation and boundaries of fairways, channels, etc.
Other: Other objects, such as spot soundings, submarine cables and pipelines, ferry routes and details
of all isolated dangers.

Note: When the chart is firstly displayed, the standard display is displayed. For safety for sailing, use the stan-
dard display or other information display, and not the display base.

You can change the object category by left-clicking the [BASE], [STANDARD], or [OTHER] button on the
display panel.
The illuminating button in green is the selected one. The [BASE] button is always lit.

1) Left-click either button as follows:

Use for voyage!


Illuminated in green when selected

Left-click Left-click
[STANDARD] [OTHER]

Left-click Left-click
[BASE] [STANDARD]

• You can also use the menu to select an object category. Also, in the [STANDARD] and [OTHER]
display methods, you can specify how objects belonging to these categories should be displayed.
The display will show specified objects. Click on so that all the other objects
belonging to the [STANDARD] display will be displayed.
For selection of object display, see 3.23.1 “Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options.”

About the display in the chart area:


You will see all layers being selected.
For better understanding, you can think that various layers are used
to make up the chart display. For example, standard display consists
of the display base and information (objects) for standard display.
(EVENT mark, etc.)
This means that the display base is the basic one layer and the infor- Layer
(Other)
mation for standard display is another layer, and the standard dis- Layer
play is made up by overlapping both layers. (Standard)
Layer
Another additional layers may be own ship, user chart, event mark, Display base chart
EBL/VRM, radar image, etc. Layer

3 Basic Operation 3-34


[BASE display example]

[STANDARD display example]

[OTHER display example]

3-35 3 Basic Operation


3.6 Shifting the Chart
The JAN-901 is designed so that your ship’s position is displayed on the chart to monitor the sailing at all times. So,
as the sailing proceeds, the corresponding chart is automatically called up and displayed on the screen.
The chart can be shifted by the following methods:
• [HOME] button
• Using the cross cursor (Left-click at any position on the chart)
• Gripping the chart with the hand cursor (While left-clicking, move the hand cursor.)
• [PORT LIST] button
• Using the position entry panel

3.6.1 Shifting the Chart with the [HOME] button


At any time, you can shift the chart where your ship to a position in the chart area with plenty of room to advance.
This function will be helpful, if you have lost you ship on the chart.

1) Left-click the [HOME] button on the display panel.


• You can also perform the operation from the menu.
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(4) Home] in that order.

Your ship will return to a


osition in the chart area with
plenty of room to advance.

Own ship symbol

[Screen Display of Ship's Position]

3.6.2 Shifting the Chart with the Cross Cursor


You can shift the chart using the cross cursor by simply left-clicking at any position on the chart. Then, the position
becomes the center of the chart.

1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the position you want to set it at the center of the chart.
2) Left-click at that position.

Cross cursor intersecting point

[Moving to the Center of the Screen]

3 Basic Operation 3-36


Note: If the cursor is not the cross cursor (e.g. lens cursor), select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(1) Scroll] to
return the cursor to the cross cursor. Right-clicking and selecting the shortcut menu “Abort” will
also return the cursor to the cross cursor.

3.6.3 Shifting the Chart with the Hand Cursor


You can grip the chart and move it freely.

1) Rotate the trackball and move the cross cursor to the position you want to grip the chart.
3
2) Keep left-clicked until the cross cursor changes to the hand cursor.
3) While keeping left-clicked, rotate the trackball to move the chart.

Hand cursor

Note: If the cursor is not the cross cursor (e.g. lens cursor), select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(1) Scroll] to
return the cursor to the cross cursor. Right-clicking and selecting the shortcut menu “Abort” will
also return the cursor to the cross cursor.

3.6.4 Shifting the Chart with the [PORT LIST] Button


If a port is already registered, you can switch to that chart. The registered chart is displayed with the registered
scale.
• To return to the original chart where the ship is there, press the [HOME] button.

Note: Before using this function, you should register a desired position as a port. See 3.21.1 “Adding to My Port
List”.

(1) Button operation to jump to the port


1) Left-click the [PORT LIST] button on the display panel.
The drop-down list for ports opens.
2) Left-click a port name you want to jump there.
The position registered as the port will be displayed at the center of the screen.

Registered position as a port

3-37 3 Basic Operation


(2) Menu operation to jump to the port
Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(3) My Port List] in that order.
The “Marked Position” panel opens, where position and scale column are shown.

• To jump to the port, left-click a port name then the [Jump] button.
• To delete the registered port, left-click a port name then the [Delete] button.
• To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.

3 Basic Operation 3-38


3.6.5 Displaying the Chart by Entering the Position
You can see the chart to the position you want by entering the position in the position entry panel.
You can operate from the menu only.
• To return to the original chart where your ship is, press the [HOME] button.

1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(1) Enter Position] in that order.
The “Enter Position” panel opens.
2) Enter the position (latitude and longitude), and left-click the [OK] button.
3
The panel closes and the chart will be displayed to the designated position.

3-39 3 Basic Operation


3.7 Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only)
The chart can be zoomed in or out by the following methods:
• Zoom area function using the rubber band ([ZOOM]/[Zoom Area])
• Zoom in/out ([Range +/-]/[Zoom In]/[Zoom Out])
• Range selection (Range drop-down list)
• Scale selection (Scale drop-down list)

3.7.1 Zooming Area Using the Rubber Band (S-57/C-MAP Only)


You can enlarge the area surrounded by the rubber band full in the display. You can operate using the operation
panel, display panel , or menu.

1) Select the function by performing one of the following methods:


• Press the [ZOOM] key on the operation panel ZOOM
• Left-click the [Zoom Area] button on the display panel.
• Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(2) Zoom Area] in that order.
The cross cursor changes to the lens cursor.

2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the top left of the area “A” you want to enlarge, and left-click
there.
3) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the bottom right of the area “B” you want to enlarge, and left-
click there.
The rubber band surrounds the specified area to be enlarged.
• After enlarged, the lens cursor returns to the cross cursor.

Selected area

[Zooming area using the rubber band]

Switching charts:
Usually, charts with different scales are displayed in the same area. Due to the zoom in/zoom out functions,
charts with a matching scale are selected and displayed. When a displayable scale range is assigned to an
original scale of a chart and when this original scale is beyond the range, the chart will not be displayed unless
there are other displayable charts. This equipment shows in background a chart that looks like a world map as
a reference. This chart will be displayed when charts are zoomed out to a scale of 1:1,500,000 or smaller.

3 Basic Operation 3-40


3.7.2 Zooming In/Out (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can zoom in or out using the [RANGE +/-] key, [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] button, or [Zoom In]/[Zoom Out] menu.

(1) Zooming in/out using the operation panel


1) Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key on the operation panel.
Each time the key is pressed, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount or the scale set by the system.
• Select range or scale for the zooming method.
• For switchable ranges, see 3.7.3 “Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only).” For scales, see 3.7.4
3
“Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only).”

+
RANGE

(2) Zooming in/out using the display panel


1) Left-click the [Zoom In] or [Zoom Out] button on the display panel.
Each time you press the key, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount set by the system.

(3) Zooming in/out from the menu


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(3) Zoom In] / [(4) Zoom Out] in that order.
Each time you select the menu, the chart is zoomed in or out by the amount set by the system.

Over-scale alarm:
When the ship enters a different chart, an over-scale alarm occurs if
the displayed chart is more than double in size than the original
data. The “Chart” alarm will then be displayed on the alarm display
panel. Meanwhile, vertical lines as seen in the figure on the right
will appear to notify lower chart accuracy and clarity. The alarm
will occur if the size has been made larger (double or more) through
proper operation.
Warning lines for overscaling

3-41 3 Basic Operation


3.7.3 Switching the Range (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can switch the range of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel or using the menu.

(1) Switching the range using the display panel


1) Left-click the range switching drop-down list button on the display panel.
2) Left-click the range in the list.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the range you have selected.

Zoomed out

Zoomed in

(2) Switching the range from the menu


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(2) Select Range] in that order.
Available ranges are displayed.
• You cannot select the inactive range. Also, you cannot change it to the active range.
2) Left-click the range value you want.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the range you have selected.

Inactive range

3 Basic Operation 3-42


3.7.4 Switching the Scale (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can switch the scale of the chart using the drop-down list on the display panel or using the menu.

(1) Switching the scale using the display panel


1) Left-click the scale switching drop-down list button on the display panel.
2) Left-click the scale in the list.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the scale you have selected.
3
(2) Switching the scale using the menu
1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(1) Select Scale] in that order.
Available scales are displayed.
2) Left-click the scale value you want.
The chart is zoomed in or out according to the scale you have selected.

Note: To enable or disable the selectable scales, select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(3) Scale].
For details, see 3.23.3 “Setting Scales”. Disabled scale will be displayed inactively (faintly).

Zoomed out

Zoomed in

3-43 3 Basic Operation


3.8 ARCS Chart Display Options (ARCS Only)
The following display options are explained here.
• High resolution area selection with the cross cursor
• Larger chart/smaller chart selection (using [Larger Chart]/[Smaller Chart] buttons on the display panel)
• Various options accessible from the menu

3.8.1 High Resolution Area Selection (ARCS Only)


When you use a low resolution chart, you can display the high resolution area with the cross cursor.

1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(3) High Resolution Area] in that order.
2) Left-click the cross cursor. Then the high resolution area is displayed on the screen with the left-clicked
position centered.

3.8.2 Selecting Larger/Smaller Chart (ARCS Only)


In the ARCS chart, you can select a larger or smaller chart using the display panel, menu, or the [RANGE+/-] key
on the operation panel.

To select larger/smaller chart using the operation panel:


1) Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key on the operation panel.

To select larger/smaller chart using the buttons on the display panel:


1) Left-click the [Larger Chart] or [Smaller Chart] button on the display panel.
Each time you left-click the button, the larger chart or smaller chart will be displayed.

To select larger/smaller chart using the menu:


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(7) Scale] - [(3) Larger Chart] / [(4) Smaller Chart] in that order.

3 Basic Operation 3-44


3.8.3 Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only)
1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(1) Select Chart under
Cursor] in that order.
The “Select Chart” panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart No. you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.

3.8.4 Selecting Chart from All (ARCS Only)


You can select a chart from all the charts loaded in the hard disk.

1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(2) Select Chart from all]
in that order.
The “Select Chart” panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart No. you want, and then left-click the [OK] button.
The panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.

• Set the “Preview” to ON to use preview function. You can see the
selected chart on the screen while opening this panel.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Tips!
You can open the “Select Chart” panel by left-clicking [Select Chart] button on the display panel.

3-45 3 Basic Operation


3.8.5 Changing Active Panels
A panel is displayed as a blue square for each chart. A selected chart will be displayed.

1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(3) Change Active Panel] in that order.
An available chart will be displayed as a blue square.
2) Left-click on the blue rectangular so that the selected chart will be displayed.

Blue square
[Selected chart]

3 Basic Operation 3-46


3.8.6 Loading a Low Resolution Chart (ARCS Only)
You can select the low resolution chart.
1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(4) Load Low Resolution] in that order.
Then, the low resolution chart is displayed on the screen.

3.8.7 To Select the High Resolution Chart (ARCS Only) 3


1) Right-click the cursor on the chart and se-
lect the “High Resolution Area” from the
pop-up menu by left-clicking it. T h e n ,
the orange square frame with the lens cur-
sor appears. The area surrounded by the or-
ange frame shows the are to be magnified.
2) Move the cursor (orange frame) to specify
the area to be magnified and left-click the
cursor.

[Magnified chart: High resolution chart] Orange frame

3-47 3 Basic Operation


3.8.8 Displaying the Note and Diagram (ARCS Only)
You can display the note and diagram list defined by the current chart.

1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(5) Note and Diagram] in that order.
The “Note and Diagram” panel opens.

2) Select the item you want to display, and then left-click the [OK] button.

3.8.9 Displaying Temporary and Preliminary Notice (ARCS Only)


You can display the temporary and preliminary notice list of the current chart.

1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(6) Temporary and Preliminary Notice] in that order.
The “Temporary and Preliminary” panel opens.

2) Select the item you want to display, and then left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the “Information” panel of the temporary and preliminary notice list for the current chart is dis-
played as shown in the picture.

3 Basic Operation 3-48


3

3.8.10 Adjusting Datum (ARCS Only)


(1) Entering offset

Note: Do not adjust datum offset unless you need it. This adjustment will be required only when the
geodetic system of the chart is the local one and its display position is misaligned.

You can shift the chart position by entering offset values (latitude/longitude) or by using the cursor.

1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(7) Adjust Datum Offset] in that order.
The “Chart Shift” panel opens.
2) Enter the offset value and left-click the [OK] button.

Using the Cursor:


1) In the “Chart Shift” panel, left-click the [by Cursor] button.
The cursor type changes.

3-49 3 Basic Operation


2) Move the cursor and left-click at the first position. Then, move the cursor to draw the orange line to
determine the amount of offset, and left-click the cursor at the second position.
Then, the offset values thus obtained are displayed on the “Chart Shift” panel. (You can edit the value.)
Note that the cursor position is always displayed at the bottom of the display panel.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

Orange Line

Cursor

(2) Transforming the datum


You can convert the geodetic datum of a position or the own ship’s position to the WGS-84 system.

1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(8) Datum Transformation] in that order.
The “Reference Position” panel opens.

2) Enter the reference position using one of the following methods:


• Enter the position into the value entry boxes.
• Left-click the [Ship Position] button to enter the own ship’s position.
• Left-click the [by Cursor] button and left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the position is
entered.
3) Left-click the “Geodetic Datum From” drop-down button and select the geodetic systems by left-clicking
it.
4) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the geodetic datum conversion is performed.

3 Basic Operation 3-50


3.9 Selecting a S-57/C-MAP Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only)
After power ON, the chart on which your ship exists is automatically called up so that the voyage can be monitored
at all times. When you want to display other chart, perform the following operation.

1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(4) Select S-57/C-MAP Chart] in that order.
The “Select Chart” panel opens.
2) Left-click the chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The “Select Chart” panel closes and the selected chart is displayed on the screen.
3

By pressing the [HOME] button on the display, you can display the chart on whith your ship is.

3-51 3 Basic Operation


3.10 Displaying a User Chart
You can display a user chart you have made.

Note: Before use of this function, you need to make a user chart beforehand. See 5 “Chart Editing”.

1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(1) Select User Chart] in that order.
The “Open Chart File” panel opens.

2) Left-click the user chart name you want and then left-click the [OK] button.
The “Open Chart File” panel closes and the selected user chart is displayed on the screen.

To clear the displayed user chart from the screen:


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(3) Clear User Charts] in that order.
Then, the user chart is cleared from the screen.

3 Basic Operation 3-52


3.11 Accepting the S-57 Updating Chart
You can merge the S-57 updating charts with the original charts. Whether you merge the updating chart here in
ECDIS main screen or you merge it when importing with the Chart Portfolio is selectable in the Chart Portfolio
setting. (For Chart Portfolio operation, see 8 “Chart Portfolio”.

1) Be sure that the SENC information level is set to STANDARD or OTHER and not BASE.

STANDARD is selected.
3
2) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Accept S-57 Updates] in that order.
The “Accept Updates” panel opens.

3) Left-click one of the S-57 updating charts in the table.


If you want to display and check the updating objects, left-click the [Show] button.
Then, the S-57 updating chart will be displayed on the chart.
The objects of the updating chart will be superimposed on the original chart and show in red.

Accept updating
objects by left-clicking
the [OK] button.

Updating objects will be dis- The updating objects are merged with the
played in red. original chart and its color is changed from
red to normal one.

4) Left-click the [OK] button.


The panel closes and the updating objects are merged with the original chart.

3-53 3 Basic Operation


3.12 User-Marking/Highlighting
You can input the following marks on the chart.
• EVENT mark: During voyage, you can put an event mark at the ship position.
• Information mark: You can put an information mark at any position.
• Tidal stream mark: You can put an tidal mark at any position. The speed (knot) and bearing can be input.
• Highlighting: You can put a highlight area at any position for your reference.

Information mark
Highlighing
Own ship

i
EVENT mark

5.0
30.0

Knot
Bearing
Tidal Stream mark

3.12.1 Marking the Event Mark (EVENT)


(1) Event marking using the display panel
During voyage, you can put an EVENT mark ( ) at the point where your ship is located.
1) Left-click the [EVENT] button on the display panel.

• To check the information on the EVENT mark, see 3.13 “Reading Out Information of the Objects
([INFO])”.

(2) Event marking using the menu


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(1) Event-Mark] in that order.
The “Location/Attributes - Event Mark” panel opens.

3 Basic Operation 3-54


2) In the “Location/Attributes - Event Mark” panel, perform the following editing operation.
• Enter time if you want to correct the displayed time.
• Enter comment on the event.
• You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the EVENT mark.
• To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK] button.
You will see that the EVENT mark ( ) is put on the chart.
Position of the EVENT mark
3
EVENT mark

(3) How to delete the EVENT mark


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(5) Delete Event-Mark] in that order.
The “Delete Event Mark” panel opens.
2) Left-click the EVENT No. you want and then left-click the [Delete] button.
The panel closes and the selected EVENT mark is deleted from the chart.

3-55 3 Basic Operation


3.12.2 Marking the Information Mark
You can put an information mark ( ) at any point on the chart.

1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(2) Information Mark] in that order.
The “Location/Attributes” panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3) In the “Location/Attributes” panel, perform the following editing operation.
• Enter the comment on the information mark.
• You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the information mark.
• To edit the information mark position, left-click the [Edit] button.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens.
• Enter the value and left-click the [OK] button.
• To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK] button.
You will see that the information mark ( ) is put on the screen.
Information mark
Position of the information mark

• For viewing the information on the information mark or editing/deleting the information mark, see 3.13
“Reading Out Information on the Objects ([INFO])”.

3 Basic Operation 3-56


3.12.3 Marking the Tidal Stream Mark
You can put a tidal stream mark at any point on the chart. The tidal stream mark has the bearing and stream speed
in knot. You can edit them after putting the tidal stream mark on the chart.

1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(3) Tidal Stream Mark] in that order.
The “Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream” panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the cursor.
2) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the point you want and left-click at that position.
The left-clicked position is displayed in the position box of the panel.
3
3) In the “Location/Attributes - Tidal Stream” panel, perform the following editing operation.
• Set/Drift setting
• Left-click either Actual or Predicted.
• Enter the bearing and speed.
• Enter comment on the tidal stream mark.
• You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the tidal stream mark.
• To edit the tidal mark position, left-click the [Edit] button.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens.
Enter the value and left-click the [OK] button.
• To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK] button.
You will see that the tidal stream mark is put on the screen.
Position of the tidal stream mark

5.0
30.0

Knot
Bearing
Tidal Stream mark

• For viewing the information on the tidal stream mark or editing/deleting the tidal stream mark, see 3.13
“Reading Out Information on the Objects ([INFO])”.

3-57 3 Basic Operation


3.12.4 Highlighting
You can use a polygon to highlight any parts of a chart. This function can be used when you wish to make notations.

1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Marking/Highlighting] - [(4) Highlight] in that order.
The “Location/Attributes” panel opens and the cross cursor changes to the cursor.
2) Use the trackball to move the cursor to the part to be highlighted. Then, click on the coordinates of a point
which will be the starting point of the area to be highlighted.
3) In the “Location/Attributes” panel, perform the following editing operation.
• Enter comment on the highlighting.
• You can edit the minimum scale and maximum scale that limit the display of the highlighting.
• To edit the highlighting position, left-click the [Edit] button.
The latitude and longitude entry panel opens.
Enter the value and left-click the [OK] button.
• To fix the contents and close the panel, left-click the [OK] button.
You will see that the highlighting is put on the screen.

Highlighting

Top of a highlighted area

• For viewing the information on the highlighting or editing/deleting the highlighting, see 3.13 “Reading
Out Information on the Objects ([INFO])”.

3 Basic Operation 3-58


3.13 Reading Out Information of the Objects ([INFO])
Each of the objects on the chart has its own information (e.g. lighthouse, buoy, depth contour, land, river). For
example, if an object is a lighthouse, information such as lighting color and frequency can be readout. If the object
is depth contour, the water depth can be read out. The chart will be the original chart (S-57/C-MAP/ARCS). Also,
you can read out the information on the marks such as the EVENT mark you entered.
To read out the information, you can use the [INFO] key on the operation panel or you can use the menu.

(1) Reading out using the operation panel ([INFO])


3
You can read out the information of the objects on the S-57/C-MAP chart or ARCS chart.
1) Press the [INFO] key on the operation panel.
The cross cursor changes to the box cursor. INFO

2) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the information panel on the S-57/C-MAP chart or ARCS chart will open and you can see the
information on the object selected.

[Display Example]

(2) Reading out using the menu


In addition to the object information on the S-57/C-MAP/ARCS chart, you can view the information on the
marks such as the EVENT mark you entered.
1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(9) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] or - [(1) Other Information] in that
order.
Then, the cross cursor changes to the box cursor ( ).
2) Rotate the trackball, point the cursor to the object on the chart, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the information panel opens according to the selected object.

3-59 3 Basic Operation


When the S-57/C-MAP/ARCS object is selected:
• To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.
[Example: When [(9) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] is selected]

When the marking entered by the user is selected:


The information panel opens and you can get information on the EVENT, Information, Tidal Stream, or
Highlight mark.
• To edit the object, left-click the [Edit] button.
The “Location/Attributes” panel used when inputting the mark, mentioned earlier is opened.
• To delete the object, left-click the [Delete] button.
• To close the panel, left-click the [Close] button.

[Example for the EVENT mark: When [(1) Other Chart Information] is selected]

3 Basic Operation 3-60


3.14 Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide View)
The JAN-901 has multi view and wide view functions. You can divide the chart screen into two sections in which
the same charts or different chart (not different geodetic system) can be displayed in various ways. Also, with the
wide view function, you can see the additional wide view screen in the display panel area.

Active screen (Blue)


Own ship’s symbol
3
View 1

View 1 screen
Multi view
screen example

View 2 screen View 1 screen (Blue when active)

View 2
View 2 screen (Red when inactive)

Inactive screen Wide view screen

[Multi View and Wide View]

3.14.1 Multi View Screen


You can display two screens, View 1 and View 2 simultaneously. The active screen has a blue stripe as shown in the
above figure. The other side screen is inactive.
To set the View 1 screen active, for example, left-click the View 1 screen.

1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(6) Multi View] in that order.


2) Left-click one of the submenus to select the multi view type.
Then, the selected multi view is displayed.
• Single View • Top Bottom • Right Left • Right Top View
• Left Top View • Right Bottom View • Left Bottom View

(Single view) (Top Bottom view) (Right Left view) (Right Top view)

View 1 View 2
View 1 View 2
View 1
View 2

(Left Top view) (Right Bottom view) (Left Bottom view)

View 2
View 1 View 1
View 1
View 2 View 2

To return to the single view:


Left-click [(1) Single View]. Then, the screen will return to the normal screen (single view).

3-61 3 Basic Operation


3.14.2 Selecting an Area
A selected area will be displayed as the Right Top view.
1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(6) Multi View] - [(8) Select Area] in that order. The cursor becomes the
lens cursor.
2) The area selected with the lens cursor will be displayed as the Right Top view.

3.14.3 Wide View Screen


You can display the wide view screen on the display panel. The buttons that were the wide view screen section
move to the upper part of the screen.

1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(6) Multi View] - [(9) Wide Range View] in that order.
The wide view screen appears in the display panel area.
In the wide view screen, the currently displayed area is surrounded by the blue line.
If multi view function is used, both areas for View 1 and View 2 will be surrounded with the blue line (for
active view) and red line (for inactive view), if both are on the same chart.

[Close] button

Wide view
Area currently displayed
To close the wide view screen:
Left-click on the [Close] button on the left top corner of the screen.
Then, the wide view screen disappears from the display panel and the buttons return to the original place.

3 Basic Operation 3-62


3.15 Using the Analog Meter
During voyage, you can display the analog meter on the display panel. You can see the course, heading, course to
steer, set, etc. on the analog meter. Also, you can select the items to be displayed on the analog meter.

1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(4) Analog Meter] in that order.


The following analog meter is displayed.
On the analog meter panel, items with the arrow mark (e.g. COURSE) are represented by the indicators of
the analog meter. The color of the item and that of the indicator match each other. So, you can easily
3
identify each indicator from the color.

The white mark corresponds to the white pointer.


(Color matches each other in all items.)
Course and speed (The vector of the vessel’s motion over the
ground and the course of the route selected.)

Ship’s heading
Log speed (speed through water)
Course to Steer
Note: It is displayed during Automatic Sailing only.

Current direction calculated by the difference between the COG and


HDG vectors
Current speed calculated by the difference between the COG and HDG
vectors

CTS
SET
HEADING
COURSE

[OFF] button

To close the analog meter:


Left-click the [OFF] button on the analog meter.

Changing the items to be displayed on the analog meter:


1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(3) Analog Meter] in that order.
Then, the “Analog Display Option” panel opens.
2) Left-click to turn ON/OFF the items you want to display and left-click the [OK] button.

Turns ON/OFF the arrow marks on the panel.

3-63 3 Basic Operation


3.16 Own Ship’s Setting ([Ship] - [Option])
The following settings on own ship are explained here.
• Primary position (of own ship) and secondary position settings
• Vector display and heading line at the primary position
• Danger detection vector and guard ring
• Primary position track and time label, etc.
Each item is shown in the following figure.

Heading line HDG vector

Gurad ring (up to 360 degrees)

Own ship (Primary position)

Time labels
Every 10 to 60 min.

COG vector

Danger detection vector

Own ship (Secondary position) Tracking dots Tracking spot


Every 1 to 60 sec. Every 10 sec. to 10 min.
Max. 60 min.
Tracking period (1 to 24 hours)
[Own Ship’s Setting Items]

3.16.1 Primary Position and Secondary Position of Own Ship


On JAN-901, you can select one of the navigation methods (e.g. GPS navigation, LORAN or Dead-Reckon-
ing). This is called the primary position “POS1” (main position) or system position. A secondary position
“POS2” (auxiliary position) can also be selected independent of the primary position. This system constantly
checks how far the primary and secondary positions are apart to monitor their mutual positions.

1) Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(0) Option] in that order.


The “Own Ship Option” panel opens.
2) Set each item and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

Ship’s name

Position fixing system display for the primary


position “POS1” ((D)GPS1, (D)GPS2, LO-
RAN-C, DECCA, DR, or none)

Position fixing system display for the secondary


position “POS2” ((D)GPS1, (D)GPS2, LORAN-
C, DECCA, DR, or none) If set to “none”, the
Secondary position display ON/OFF secondary position is not displayed on the chart.

Note: The position fixing system displayed for the primary and secondary positions depends on the ship’s
specifications set by the service engineer.

3 Basic Operation 3-64


3.16.2 Ship’s Shape
You can select your ship’s shape, either symbol (a) or outline (b). Either (a) or (b) will be displayed at the
primary position on the chart.
Shape of the outline (b) depends on the scale of the chart and the width and length of the ship setting at
installation. Even though you choose the outline (b), the symbol (a) will be displayed unless enlarged chart is
selected. When the chart is enlarged, the outline (b) will be displayed.

Width of ship according to


scale
3
Length of ship according
to scale

(a) (b)
[Your Ship Symbol]

1) Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(0) Option] in that order.


The “Own Ship Option” panel is displayed.
2) In the “Ship’s Shape” panel, left-click either “Symbol” (a) or “Out Line” (b).
Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

3-65 3 Basic Operation


3.16.3 Vector Display and Heading Line at Primary Position
The COG vector (vector of the vessel’s motion over the ground), HDG vector (vector of the vessel’s motion
through the water) and heading line can be displayed for your ship’s symbol.
The COG and HDG vectors can be displayed at lengths proportional to the ship’s current speed in minutes.
For example, if the vector length is set as 5 minutes, a vector with 1-minute notches is displayed.
The tip of the vector is the expected position in 5 minutes assuming that the ship sails at the current speed.

Heading line

HDG vector

Expected position after Vector length


5 min., for example

COG vector
Vector time mark (1 min. each)

[Vector Display and Heading line]

1) Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(0) Option] in that order.


The “Own Ship Option” panel is displayed.
2) Set each item on the “Vector” panel.
To display the heading line ON/OFF, left-click the “Display Head Line” on the “Own Ship Option” panel.
Then, left-click the [OK] button on the “Own Ship Option” panel. Then, the panel will close.

Turns ON/OFF the COG vector display.

Turns ON/OFF the HDG vector display.

COG/HDG vector time until the ship


reaches the expected position. (Max. 60
min.)

Vector Time Mark ON/OFF

Heading line ON/OFF

3 Basic Operation 3-66


3.16.4 Danger Detection Vector and Guard Ring
You can set the danger detection vector and guard ring for your safety. The danger detection vector can be set
the monitoring area of the cross line of the safety contour and the danger area etc. While, the guard ring can be
set to monitor dangerous objects around your ship. The danger detection vector is shown in the rectangular
shape and the tip of the vector is the expected time assuming that the ship sails at the current speed. The guard
ring and its radius can be set as required.

HDG vector Gurad ring


3
Gurad ring radius in nm
Danger detection vector

Angle

COG vector

Danger detection vector in minute


[Danger Detection Vector and Guard Ring]

1) Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(0) Option] in that order.


The “Own Ship Option” panel is displayed.
2) Left-click each item on the “Alarm Detection” panel and then click the [Set Alarm Limit] button.
The “Alarm List Option” panel opens.
Guard ring display ON/OFF

Danger detection vector display ON/OFF

3) Left-click the “Vector” and “Sector” and enter the value


• Vector: Danger detection vector in minute
• Sector: Guard ring radius in “nm” and the angle (up to 360 degrees)

4) Left-click the [OK] button on the “Alarm List Option” panel, and then the [OK] button on the “Own Ship
Option” panel to close all panels.

3-67 3 Basic Operation


3.16.5 Track and Time Label Display
The primary position of own ship is memorized to hard disk every second, and up to 24 hours of information
is displayed on the chart as the track as follows:
• The past 60 minutes (Max.) from the present are displayed in seconds (Min.).
• From the past 60 minutes further, the track is displayed in 10 seconds (Min.).
• The track can be displayed in one of seven colors.
• The time label is displayed on the track at the preset time interval.
Own ship (Primary position) Time labels
Every 10 to 60 min.

Tracking dots Tracking spot


Every 1 to 60 sec. Every 10 sec. to 10 min.
Max. 60 min.
Tracking period (1 to 24 hours)

[Primary Position Track and Time Label]

1) Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(0) Option] in that order.


The “Own Ship Option” panel is displayed.
2) In the "Track/Head Line" panel, left-click “Display Tracking” and “Display Time Label” to select them.
3) Select one of seven colors you want from the drop-down list. Also enter values while reading the complete
sentence written on the panel.
Then, left-click the [OK] button on the “Own Ship Option” panel to close it.

Color of ship’s track (Red, Green, Blue, Ma-


genta, Orange, Brown, or Black)
1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16, or 24 hour

0, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min.

1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 sec.

10, 20, or 30 sec., or 1, 2, 3, 5, 10 min.

10, 30, 60 min.

3 Basic Operation 3-68


3.16.6 Display and Track of Secondary Position
The secondary track symbol is displayed as regardless of the scale, and the past six minutes of information are
displayed in green as the track. Information other than this cannot be displayed. The symbol and track can
also be turned ON and OFF.

1) Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(0) Option] in that order.


The “Own Ship Option” panel is displayed.
2) In the "Position" panel, left-click the "Display Position2" to turn it ON/OFF.
3
Then, left-click the [OK] button on the “Own Ship Option” panel to close it.

3.16.7 Bearing and Speed Settings


More ship settings can be made in the following panels.

1) Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(0) Option] in that order.


The “Own Ship Option” panel is displayed.
2) Left-click the item to select it, and enter value to the value entry box.
a) Heading
• Heading Sensor:
Heading sensor’s information is used to determine the heading of the ship. If the sensor being used
detects the synchro/step gyro, entering the initial value will be necessary. After entering the value,
left-click the [Set] button to fix it.
• Manual (not used usually):
Enter the value when you apply this value as the heading of the ship.
b) Speed
• Log Sensor:
Log sensor’s information is used to determine the speed of the ship.
• Manual (not used usually):
Enter the value when you apply this value as the speed of the ship.
c) Beam bearing line
Left-click to turn it ON/OFF.
3) Left-click the [OK] button on the “Own Ship Option” panel to close it.

3-69 3 Basic Operation


3.17 Operating EBL/VRM
There are two ways to draw the EBL (Electronic Bearing Line)/VRM (Variable Range Maker) on the chart.
• Using the [EBL1/2] and [VRM1/2] keys and EBL/VRM dials on the operation panel
• Using the menu (1 step or 2 step operation selectable)

3.17.1 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Operation Panel


On the operation panel, two sets of EBL/VRMs can be used for measuring bearing and distance. You can also set
your ship’s position or any position as the center (base point) of the EBL/VRM.

(1) Displaying and clearing the EBL1/VRM1 marker


If you press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key, the EBL1 or VRM1 marker with your ship as the base point, and the
EBL1/VRM1 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a solid line. Each of these
markers are controlled by turning the EBL or VRM dial.
Position information
for cursor
Bearing of EBL1
EBL1

Your ship
Distance of VRM1
VRM
Position of crossing point of EBL1/VRM1
Information for EBL1/VRM1

To clear the EBL1 marker or VRM1 marker:


Press the [EBL1] or [VRM1] key again.

(2) Displaying and clearing the EBL2/VRM2 marker


If you press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key, the EBL2 or VRM2 marker with your ship as the base point, and the
EBL2/VRM2 information panel are displayed. These markers are displayed as a dotted line to distinguish
them from EBL1/VRM1. Each of these markers are controlled by turning the EBL or VRM dial.
To clear the EBL2 marker and VRM2 marker, press the [EBL2] or [VRM2] key again.

(3) Switching EBL1/VRM1 marker and EBL2/VRM2 marker operations


The following describes how to switch operation when the EBL1 and EBL2, or VRM1 and VRM2 markers
are simultaneously displayed.
For example, let’s assume that EBL1 and EBL2 are displayed on the screen, and that EBL2 can be operated by
the EBL dial. In this case, press the [EBL1] key twice so that the EBL1 can be operated by the EBL dial.

3 Basic Operation 3-70


EBL2
EBL EBL

It is possible to operate EBL1. EBL2 appears and it is possible to


operate EBL2.

EBL1 EBL2

EBL

It is possible to operate EBL1.

[Switching of EBL1/VRM1 Marker and EBL2/VRM2 Marker -- Ship-centered EBL/VRM]

Notes:
• For VRM1 and VRM2, use [VRM1] and [VRM2] key in the same way as for EBL1 and EBL2.
• They will be displayed as floating EBL/VRM while operating in free mode.

3-71 3 Basic Operation


(4) Changing the EBL/VRM marker base point
The following example describes how to change the base point for EBL1 from your ship’s position to another
position.
VRM1, EBL2 and VRM2 are operated in the same way as EBL1.
1) Hold down the [EBL1] key for at least two seconds with EBL1 displayed on screen. Then, the EBL/VRM
cursor appears.
2) Move the EBL/VRM cursor to the new base point position by rotating the trackball.
3) Left-click at the position you want. The base point is fixed at that position.

Hold down for more than 2 sec.

Move the EBL cursor to


EBL1
a destination point.

The EBL cursor appears.

Left-click

EBL

The EBL cursor disappears


and EBL1 is fixed.

[Moving the Base Point -- Floating EBL/VRM]

3 Basic Operation 3-72


To move the base point to another position, the same operation as described above should be carried out:
1) Hold down the [EBL1] key for at least two seconds with EBL1 displayed on screen. The EBL/VRM
cursor is displayed.
2) Move the EBL/VRM cursor to the new base point position by rotating the trackball.
3) Left-click at the position you want. The base point is fixed at that position.

The following operation should be carried out to set the base point at the ship’s center:
1) Make sure that the base point of the displayed EBL1 is not at the ship position. Hold down the [EBL1] key
for more than 2 seconds.
3
The base point moves to where the ship is.

Hold down for more than


2 seconds.

EBL1
(Floating EBL/VRM) (Ship-centered EBL/VRM)

The EBL cursor appears. The base point is reset at the ship’s position.

[Resetting the Base Point at the Ship’s Position]

3-73 3 Basic Operation


3.17.2 Operating EBL/VRM Using the Menu
You can draw EBL and VRM on the chart either 1-step method or 2-step (step-by-step) method.
In the 1-step method, EBL and VRM appear at the same time. In the 2-step method, EBL appears and, after fixing
EBL, VRM appears. Also, you can draw ship-centered EBL/VRM or floating EBL/VRM.

3.17.2.1 Selecting 1-step/2-step Option


1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(0) Option] in that order.
The “EBL/VRM” panel opens.
2) Left-click either “1 Step” or “2 Step” and then press the [OK] button to close the panel.
• 1 Step: Quicker operation (Both EBL and VRM appear on the chart.)
• 2 Step: Step-by-step operation (First EBL and then VRM)

3.17.2.2 1-step Operation


(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) Ship-Centered operation (1-step operation)
1) Select “1 Step” option in 3.17.2.1 as mentioned above.
2) Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(1) Ship-Centered] in that order.
• The EBLl and VRM1 are displayed on the chart.

EBL1

Intersection
Your ship
VRM1

“1”: EBL1/VRM1 Bearing of EBL1


Position of crossing
point of EBL1/VRM1
Distance of VRM1
3) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL1 and VRM1 and then left-click at the position you want.
Then, the EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed on the chart.
• The bearing and distance are displayed on the chart.

To delete the fixed EBL1/VRM1:


Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] in that order.

3 Basic Operation 3-74


(2) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) floating operation (1-step operation)
1) Select “1 Step” option in 3.17.2.1.
2) Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that order.
The EBL1 and VRM1 appear on the chart at the same time.
3) Rotate the trackball to move the center point at the position you want and left-click there.
4) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL/VRM cursor and then left-click at the position you want.
Then, the EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed on the chart.
• The bearing and distance are displayed on the chart. 3
To delete the fixed EBL1/VRM1:
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] in that order.

EBL1
VRM1

Center point
Intersection

Tips: Useful shortcut -- Abort


During EBL/VRM operation, for example, you can cancel the current operation step by the following proce-
dure.

Right-click at any position on the


chart to open the shortcut menu. Rotate the trackball to move Left-click “Abort” to abort
“Abort” shortcut menu will open. the cursor on the “Abort”. the current operation step.

3-75 3 Basic Operation


(3) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Ship-Centered operation (1-step operation)
1) Select “1 Step” option in 3.17.2.1.
2) Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(5) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] - [(1) Ship-Centered] in that order.
The EBL2 and VRM2 appear on the chart at the same time.
3) Operate in the same manner as for EBL1/VRM1.
• The EBL2/VRM2 lines are dash-dotted ones.
• The bearing, distance and position are displayed in the same way as for EBL1/VRM1 except for “2”.

For EBL2/VRM2

To delete the fixed EBL2/VRM2:


Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(2) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] in that
order.

(4) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Floating operation (1-step operation)


1) Select “2 Step” option in 3.17.2.1.
2) Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(5) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that order.
The EBL2 and VRM2 appear on the chart at the same time.
3) Operate in the same manner as for EBL1/VRM1.

To delete the fixed EBL2/VRM2:


Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(2) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] in that
order.

3 Basic Operation 3-76


3.17.2.3 2-step Operation
(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) Ship-Centered operation (2-step operation)
1) Select “2 Step” option in 3.17.2.1.
2) Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(1) Ship-Centered] in that order.
The EBL appears on the chart.

EBL1 3
Your ship

3) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL1 and then left-click at the bearing you want.
Then, the EBL1 is fixed and VRM1 appears on the chart.
4) Rotate the trackball to move the VRM1 and then left-click at the distance you want.
Now, both EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed at the position you intended.
• The bearing and distance are displayed on the chart.
After fixing, the cursor appears.

EBL1 (fixed)
EBL1 (fixed)

Intersection

Your ship
VRM1 VRM1 (fixed)

To delete the fixed EBL1/VRM1:


Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] in that order.

3-77 3 Basic Operation


(2) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line) Floating operation (2-step operation)
1) Select “2 Step” option in 3.17.2.1.
2) Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(4) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that order.
The EBL/VRM cursor and EBL1 appear on the chart. (Fig. (a))
3) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL/VRM cursor and then left-click at the position you want. (Fig. (a))
4) Rotate the trackball to move the EBL1 and then left-click at the bearing you want. (Fig. (b))
Then, the EBL1 is fixed and VRM1 appears on the chart.
5) Rotate the trackball to move the VRM1 and then left-click at the distance you want. (Fig. (c))
Now, both EBL1 and VRM1 are fixed at the position you intended.
• The bearing and distance are displayed on the chart.
(a) (b)

EBL1
Your ship

EBL/VRM cursor

(c) (d)

VRM1 VRM1
Intersection EBL1 (fixed)

After fixing, the cursor appears.

To delete the fixed EBL1/VRM1:


Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(1) EBL1/VRM1 (Dashed-Line)] in that order.

3 Basic Operation 3-78


(3) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Ship-centered operation (2-step operation)
1) Select “2 Step” option in 3.17.2.1.
2) Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(5) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] - [(1) Ship-Centered] in that order.
3) Operate in the same manner as for EBL1/VRM1.
• The EBL2/VRM2 lines are dash-dotted ones.
• The bearing, distance and position are shown in the same way as for EBL1/VRM1 except for “2” at the
left upper corner.
3

For EBL2/VRM2
To delete the fixed EBL2/VRM2:
Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(2) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] in that
order.

(4) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line) Floating operation (2-step operation)


1) Select “2 Step” option in 3.17.2.1.
2) Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(5) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] - [(2) Floating] in that order.
3) Operate in the same manner as for EBL1/VRM1.

To delete the fixed EBL2/VRM2:


Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(6) Remove EBL/VRM] - [(2) EBL2/VRM2 (Dash-Dotted-Line)] in that
order.

3-79 3 Basic Operation


3.18 Running Fix
In the running fix function, own ship and the position to be fixed are connected with the EBL and VRM. This
connection is kept regardless of the ship’s movement. So, you can see the EBL and VRM of own ship against the
fixed position at all times.

1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(7) Running Fix] in that order.


The EBL and VRM are displayed on the chart.

Fixed position

Your ship

“R”: Running Fix Bearing

Position
Distance

2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor and left-click at the position to be fixed.
• The bearing and distance are displayed at the fixed place on the chart. As the ship moves, the bearing
and distance displayed change accordingly.

[After a certain period of time]

Your ship

Fixed position

To delete the running fix:


Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(8) Remove Running Fix] in that order.

3 Basic Operation 3-80


3.19 EBL Maneuver
EBL maneuver function displays the predictable track when you turn the steering in a certain conditions.
If the maneuver curve is safely displayed, you will be able to use this curve for sailing.

Supplemental line Heading line


Planned route

3
R
REACH Maneuver curve

WOL

Own ship’s position

WOL: Steering point


REACH: Distance between when the wheel is steered and when the ship begins to turn
R: Turning radius

1) Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(2) EBL Maneuver] in that order.


The “EBL Maneuver” panel opens.

2) Set or select each item.


Reach: Enter the REACH (m).
Turn Mode: Left-click either “Radius” or “Rate”.
• Radius: Enter the constant turn diameter (nm)
• Rate: Enter the constant turn speed (deg/min.)
Heading: Shows the bearing of the head line.
Maneuver Starting Point: Shows the starting point.

Note: Properly set each value. Otherwise, the maneuver curve will be affected by the improper value.

3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the panel.

3-81 3 Basic Operation


4) Turn the trackball to determine the start point of the supplemental line.
The position of WOL (steering point) will change depending upon the starting point of the supplemental
line.

If the WOL is behind own ship’s position, the line color of the WOL will change to warn you. In this case,
you should change the starting point of the supplemental line.

5) Turn the [EBL] dial on the operation panel and set the bearing of the supplemental line.
The bearing of the supplemental line will be the bearing in which own ship will finally move. The position
of WOL will change depending upon the bearing of the supplemental line.

When the WOL is behind the ship, the WOL line becomes red. When this occurs, correct the bearing or
the position of the supplemental line.

6) Left-click the left button.


The setting will be established.

To delete EBL maneuver curve from the chart:


Select [MENU] - [(1) Cursor] - [(3) Remove EBL Maneuver] in that order.

3 Basic Operation 3-82


3.20 Selecting Motion/Azimuth Mode
You can select the motion of your ship on the chart and the azimuth of your ship relative to the chart using the
display panel buttons or the menu. Note that the selectable modes differs depending on the chart type, either S-57/
C-MAP or ARCS.

S-57/C-MAP Chart:
[Possible combination between Motion and Azimuth modes]
Azimuth North Up Course Up Rotation
3
Motion
True Yes No Yes
Relative Yes Yes Yes
For Rotation mode Free Yes No Yes

Motion drop-down
list button Azimuth drop-down
list button

ARCS Chart:
Motion drop-down
list button Fixed
(not selectable)

Explanation of each mode:


For selectable modes, see the above explanation. For example, on the S-57/C-MAP chart, you cannot use the
combination of True/Free mode and Course Up mode. Also, on the ARCS chart, you cannot select Azimuth mode.
Motion mode (True/Relative/Free):
True: Land and other fixed objects are fixed on the display and only own ship moves on the display. When
own ship reaches the predetermined limit, the chart is automatically shifted so that own ship always
remains on the screen.
Relative: Own ship is fixed at the center of the screen and the fixed objects such as land move relatively.
Free: You can freely rotate the chart on the display regardless of the own ship’s direction of travel. Also, as
the ship goes, it move and will disappear from the screen.

[True Mode] [Relative Mode] [Free Mode]


Fixed Heading line Heading line Fixed Own ship

Heading
line

Own ship

Fixed
Own ship

3-83 3 Basic Operation


Azimuth mode (North Up/Course Up/Rotation) (S-57/C-MAP Only):
North UP: The chart is displayed so that the chart always orients the north. Fixed objects do not flicker and are
easily identified on the chart, and the true bearing of the objects can readily be read out.
Course UP: The chart automatically rotates so that the own ship always faces up on the display.
Rotation: You can rotate the chart by the specified degrees by 1-degree step.

[North Up Mode] [Course Up Mode] [Rotation Mode] e.g. turned 10 degrees


Heading line Heading line Heading line

Own ship Own ship Own ship

Mode change caused by the operation:


In the following cases, the motion/azimuth mode will be automatically change from the current mode to another
one.
• From True mode to Free mode:
• When the own ship goes exceeding the display limit of the screen.
• When a chart where the ship does not exist is displayed by loading a new chart, including by means of the
[PORT LIST] button on the display panel.
• From Relative mode to Free mode:
• When the chart is scrolled.
• When a chart is loaded, including by means of the [PORT LIST] button on the display panel.
• From Free mode to True mode:
• When the [HOME] button is left-clicked.
In this case, Azimuth mode is forcedly set to North Up mode so that the chart orients the north.

3.20.1 Selecting Motion Mode


You can select Motion mode using the display panel or from the menu.

(1) Selecting Motion mode using the display panel


1) Left-click the Motion drop-down list button on the display panel.

Motion drop-down
list button

2) Select one of items (True, Relative, or Free) by left-clicking it.

(2) Selecting Motion mode from the menu


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(9) Motion] - [(1) True], - [(2) Relative], or - [(3) Free] in that order.

3 Basic Operation 3-84


3.20.2 Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP Only)
You can select Azimuth mode using the display panel or from the menu.

(1) Selecting Azimuth mode using the display panel


1) Left-click the Azimuth drop-down list button on the display panel.

Azimuth drop-down
list button
3
For Rotation mode

2) Select one of items (North Up, Course Up, or Rotation) by left-clicking it.
Then, the display changes according to your selection.
• If you select “Rotation”, enter its rotational angle in degrees. (0 - 360 degrees).

• If “True” or “Free” is selected in Motion mode, “Course Up” cannot be selected.

(2) Selecting Azimuth mode from the menu


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(8) Azimuth] - [(1) North Up], - [(2) Course UP], or - [(3) Rotation] in that
order.
The selected Azimuth mode will be carried out.

3.20.3 Setting Chart Fix Mode


LRegardless of Motion mode or Azimuth mode, the currently displayed chart will be fixed and no other charts will
be loaded.

(1) Setting Fix mode using the display panel.


1) Left-click on the [Fix] button on the display panel. The button
turns red, and the chart display becomes fixed. left-click
2) Left-click on the [Fix] button again to cancel Fix mode. The Gray Red
button turns gray again.

(2) Setting Fix mode using the menu


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Fix View] in that order.
The chart display becomes fixed.
2) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(1) Fix View] in that order again to cancel Fix mode.

3-85 3 Basic Operation


3.21 My Port List
3.21.1 Adding to My Port List
You can register any position on the chart to the My Port List. After registration, you can directly access to that
position by selecting a port name from the My Port List.
The general registration procedure is as follows:

• Select a chart and scale. Register the position to the My Port


• Shift the position you want approxi- List using the menu.
mately at the center of the chart.

1) Display the position you want to register to the My Port List.


S-57/C-MAP:
The current position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current scale. So, center the
position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another position, shift the chart area (see 3.6 “Shifting the Chart”) and zoom in/
out the chart (see 3.7 “Zooming In/Out the Chart (S-57/C-MAP Only)”) as required.
ARCS:
The current chart position will be registered as it is to the My Port List with the current size. So, center the
position you want before you register it to the My Port List.
When you want to select another chart:
• Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) ARCS] - [(1) Select Chart under Cursor] or - [(2) Select Chart from
all] in that order. For details, see 3.8.3 “Selecting Chart under Cursor (ARCS Only)” or 3.8.4 “Selecting
Chart from All (ARCS Only)”.
2) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(2) Add to my Port List] in that order.
The “Add to my Port List” panel opens.
3) Enter a name you want to register and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

To display the chart registered as My Port List:


Left-click the [PORT LIST] button on the display panel and select the port name you have entered.
(You can also select from the menu.) For details, see 3.6.4 “Shifting the Chart with the [PORT LIST] Button”.

3 Basic Operation 3-86


3.21.2 Deleting My Port List
You can delete the registered port name from the My Port List as follows:

1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(2) Off Center] - [(3) My Port List] in that order.
The “Marked Position” panel opens, where the registered port names are shown.
2) Left-click the port name you want to delete, and then the [Delete] button.
The selected port name will be deleted.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the panel.
3

3-87 3 Basic Operation


3.22 Logbook
You can display the logbook where various voyage information is written. The items to be saved as the logging data
and the items shown on the logbook table are selectable with the logbook option. How to display the logbook and
how to select the items to be saved are explained here.

3.22.1 Displaying the Logbook


The items displayed in the logbook are selectable. For the selection, see the next 3.22.2 “Setting Logbook Options”.

1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(5) Logbook] in that order.


The “Logbook” panel opens. Contents of the logbook are as follows:
(Note that, to see all the contents, scroll the panel.)
No., Date, Time,
Event (kind of alarm, EVENT, Navtex, etc. -- depends on the “Logbook Option” settings.),
POS1, POS2, Latitude, Longitude, COG, SOG, Heading, Log,
Av. Speed 4h, Av. Speed 24h (average speed recent 4/24 hours),
Voyage Dist. (G ), Voyage Dist. (W) (Voyage distance (Ground)/(Water)),
Chart, Set, Drift, Wind Dir. (direction), Wind Speed, Wave Dir. (direction), Wave Height,
Air Press (pressure), Temp., Water Temp., Engine Rev. (revolution), Comments

Button Operation (left-click the button):


[Close]: Closes the panel.
[Jump]: Left-click the log, and then left-click this button. Then, the logged ship position will be
displayed at the center of the screen.
[Print]: The “Print” panel will open. You can print out the Logbook data after setting the printing conditions.

3 Basic Operation 3-88


[Input]: You can manually enter the following values and comment as required. When the [OK]
button is left-clicked, the entered values are displayed in the “Logbook” panel. (The No.
in this panel corresponds to the No. in the “Logbook” panel.)

[Filter]: The “Logbook Option” panel opens. You can set the filtering conditions. For logbook
option settings, see the next 3.22.2 “Setting Logbook Options”.
[Export]: Logbook content is saved as a CSV file. The saved file can be edited by using a spread-
sheet application. Select one of the following items in the “Export” panel:
• Select Message: The selected log will be exported.
• From/To: Logs saved during the term specified in the entry boxes will be
exported.

The “Save As” panel will be displayed after you left-click on the [OK] button in the
“Export” panel. Enter a name in the [File name] box and then left-click on the [OK]
button.

(to be continued)

3-89 3 Basic Operation


[Delete Navtex]: You can delete the logs in which “Navtex” is included in the Event column.
Left-click one of the items for deleting.
• Selected Message: When the [OK] button is left-clicked, the selected log No. in the
“Logbook” panel is deleted.
• Before: Enter the date/time you want delete the Navtex messages before
the entered date/time.
When the [OK] button is left-clicked, the Navtex messages before
the set date/time are deleted.

[View Navtex]: Left-click the log that is including “Navtex” in the Event column, and then left-click this
button to open the “Letter” panel that shows the detailed information on the Navtex
messages.

3 Basic Operation 3-90


3.22.2 Setting Logbook Options
You can filter the trigger conditions to record the log data in the logbook. Also, you can filter the trigger conditions
to save the log data which will only be used to display in the “Logbook” panel explained in 3.22.1 “Displaying the
Logbook”.

1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Options] - [(4) Logbook] in that order.
The “Logbook Option” panel opens.
2) Left-click the option items you want to select in the “Logging” and “View” panels, and left-click the [OK]
3
button. Log data is automatically saved according to the settings on the “Logging” panel. Also, log data
will be saved for displaying in the “Logbook” panel,
For example, if you left-click and select “At Noon”. The log data is saved at noon.
Contents of the logbook options are as follows:
• At Noon: Data will be saved at 12:00 (LTM).
• Every X minutes:
Data will be saved after set duration of time.
• Route Alarm: Data will be saved when an alarm related to ECC, ACC, ACCa, arrival, deviation, or
routes occurs.
• Chart Alarm: Data will be saved when an alarm related to charts, contour lines, areas, danger, or ARCS
occurs.
• Navtex: Data will be saved when data from Navtex are received.
• When press X: Data will be saved when the [Event] button is held down.
• Autosail/Sensors:
Data will be saved when an alarm related to auto navigation, calls, A/P, POS1, POS2,
position, position differences, gyros, logs, low speeds, radar, or ARPA occurs.
• Others: Data will be saved when any other kind of alarm (settings, equipment, timer, and so on)
occurs.

[Navtex Option]: The “Filtering for display” panel opens. (See the next page.)

3-91 3 Basic Operation


Set the Navtex message filtering conditions by selecting each item on the “Station”, “Month/Year” and “Mes-
sage” panels. Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
The Navtex messages received from the selected “Station” will be filtered by the condition set by the “Month/
Year” and “Message”, and then they will be saved as the Navtex information for displaying on the chart.

The following Navtex mark will be displayed on the chart according to the
Navtex information.

• Station: You can filter the stations by specifying the first letter of the station name. For example, if you
select the letter “A”, the station name that begins with “A” will be accepted.
• Month/Year: You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the month/year.
• Message: You can filter the Navtex messages by specifying the kind of the message. For example, if you
select the letter “A”, the navigational warnings will be accepted.

3 Basic Operation 3-92


3.23 Setting the Chart Options
You can set the various chart options.

3.23.1 Setting S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Options


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(1) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS] in that order.
The “Chart Option” panel opens. This panel consists of three panels “View Common”, “View1” and
“View2”, each of which can be selected by left-clicking the tab. 3
[“View Common” panel]

3-93 3 Basic Operation


(1) Setting the “View Common” panel
The settings made here apply to “View1” and “View2” panels for single/multi-view.

1) Select a setting item and enter a value in the value entry box. Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to
close it.

a) Display Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)


• Base/Standard/Other
Selection is the same as when the [BASE], [STANDARD] and [OTHER] buttons on the display panel
are used. For detailed function, see 3.5 “Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP Only)”.
b) Area Boundary (S-57/C-MAP Only)
• Plane : Plane boundary

• Symbolized : Symbolized boundary

3 Basic Operation 3-94


c) Redraw
• Border range: Sets the border range to shift the chart when ship reaches it. (Effective only when
motion “True” is selected.)
• Margin (Course up): This function is effective only when the Cource up mode is selected. (See 3.20.2
“Selecting Azimuth Mode (S-57/C-MAP Only)”.) The chart will be turned step-
by-step by the angle set here. Namely, if the “Margin” is set to 10 degrees, the
chart will be rotated each time the ship turns more than 10 degrees.

[Border range setting]


3
• When your ship is proceeding in the direction of
the arrow in the figure

• When set border range is 50%


When your ship reaches the border range, the chart automatically shifts as follow:

50%

50%

• When set border range is 70%


When your ship reaches the border range, the chart automatically shifts as follow:

70%

70%

3-95 3 Basic Operation


d) Chart Symbol (S-57/C-MAP Only)
• Paper Chart: Lighthouses and other symbols are shown as indicated on the paper charts.
• Simplified: A color-coded symbol is displayed.
• Full Light Line: The range of lighthouse light is displayed in circle. When the Full Light Line is set to
ON, the size of the circle changes according to the chart scale. When the chart is
enlarged, the circle becomes large accordingly.
• Consider Scale Minimum: When this item is selected, if the chart is reduced exceeding the minimum
scale set in a symbol, the symbol will not be displayed.

[When “Paper Chart” is selected]

[When “Simplified” is selected]

3 Basic Operation 3-96


[Full Light Line setting]
• When “Full Light Line” is OFF

Range of lighthouse light

• When “Full Light Line” is ON

Range of lighthouse light


The size of the circle changes
according to the chart scale.

3-97 3 Basic Operation


When the minimum scale of spot depth is 1:40000 and a chart display scale is 1:50000:
• When [Consider Scale Minimum] is on

• When [Consider Scale Minimum] is off

3 Basic Operation 3-98


e) Depth Alarm (S-57/C-MAP Only)
• Shallow Contour: The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be changed.
• Safety Contour: The color of the sea indicated on the chart for the preset depth can be changed.
• Safe Depth: Depth smaller (or shallower) than the preset value are displayed enhanced.
If there is no safety depth line on the chart, a deeper safety depth line than you set is
displayed.
• Deep Contour: Contour lines smaller than the preset value are displayed enhanced.
• Two Color Depth: Generally, the sea is displayed on charts with sea depths divided into four colors.
However, when “Two Color Depth” is selected, the sea depths are displayed in two
3
colors, with Shallow Contour and Safety Contour displayed as one color, and “Safety
Depth” and “Deep Contour” displayed as another color. This feature is used to clearly
indicate and divide the sea into safe areas and dangerous areas where care must be
taken during the voyage, just like Shallow Pattern described earlier.
• Shallow Pattern: The Shallow Pattern check mark adds grid lines to shallow sea set at Shallow Con-
tour and Safety Contour in the four selectable depths. This function is for highlight-
ing areas that require special care during the voyage.

[Shallow Contour/Safety Contour/Deep Contour settings]

Shallow Contour
Deep Contour

Land
very shallow water

medium-shallow water

medium-deep water

deep water

Safety Contour

3-99 3 Basic Operation


[Two Color Depth setting]
• When “Two Color Depth” is OFF (The sea is indicated in four colors.)

Land

Shallow Contour

Safety Contour

Safety Depth

Deep Contour

• When “Two Color Depth” is ON (The sea is indicated in two colors.)

3 Basic Operation 3-100


[Shallow Pattern setting]
• When “Shallow Pattern” is ON (Shallow pattern is displayed.)

Shallow Pattern
3

• When “Shallow Pattern” is OFF (Shallow pattern disappears.)

(2) Setting the “View1” panel


The “View1” panel setting is used for the View 1 screen. Namely, this settings apply to the single view screen
(normal screen), or the View 1 screen when you select multi view function to display View 1 and View 2
screens. (For multi view function, see 3.14 “Displaying Chart in Various Ways (Multi View/Wide View)”.)

1) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF.


Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.

a) Type (Type of chart)


• S-57: S-57 chart can be displayed on the display. You can select together with “C-MAP”.
• C-MAP: C-MAP chart can be displayed on the display. You can select together with “S-57”.
• ARCS: ARCS chart can be displayed on the display.

Notes:
• ARCS can be selected only if the ARCS chart has already been installed and the ARCS PIN is correctly
inputted when the ECDIS is started.
• ARCS and other S-57 or C-MAP cannot be selected at the same time.

3-101 3 Basic Operation


b) SENC Version (S-57 Only)
• Display Previous Version: When the chart is updated, the chart before updating will be displayed.

[“View1” panel]

c) Layer (S-57/C-MAP only)


Layers displayed on the chart are listed below. There are [-] layer, [S] layer, and [O] layer.

[-]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [BASE], [STANDARD], or [OTHER] mode.
[S]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [STANDARD] or [OTHER] mode.
[O]: Items that can be set when the chart object display is in [OTHER] mode.
(For chart object display, see 3.5 “Changing the Object Category (S-57/C-MAP only).”

Display of each layer listed below can be turned on/off:

[S] objects:
• Unknown objects
• Points where geographical names are displayed
• Rivers, riverbanks, lakes, lakeshores, causeways, dykes, and dams
• Highly visible radar objects, other objects, and construction areas

3 Basic Operation 3-102


• Swept areas
• Mooring cables and undersea tunnels
• Guiding lines and clearing lines
• Recommended routes
• Ferry routes
• Radar lines and limits of shore radar
• Restricted areas


Areas for ferry routes, submarine navigation, military exercises, sea plane landing, and offshore production
Security areas and water channels
3
• Fishing grounds and marine farms
• Anchorages and berths
• Pipelines areas and cable areas
• Dredged soil waste disposal sites, cargo reshipment areas, and incineration areas
• Day-marks
• Bearings of IALA buoy areas
• Top marks
• Light
• Fog signals, reflectors, racons, and radar reflectors
• Pilot boarding sites, signal stations, and harbor control stations

[O] objects:
• Data accuracy, measurement reliability, measurement sources, and data reliability
• Information on attributes
• Data scales and ranges
• Magnetic variations and local magnetic anomalies
• Top of: dunes; hills; ridges; and quays, contour lines, and altitudes
• Trees, plants, mangroves, marches, rivers, lakes, rapid streams, waterfalls, tidal channels, and salt fields
• Landmarks, buildings, tanks, cranes, airports, railways, roads, tunnels, control stations, and quarries
• Harbor types and customs
• Distance marks
• Berthing facilities, berth numbers, mooring facilities, floodgates, dry docks, and cranes
• Spot depth
• Depth contours other than safety depth contours and line depth areas
• Whirlpools, tides, and tidal information
• Ocean floor topography, riverheads, and marine plants
• Fish banks, fish stakes, and so on
• Rocks, wrecks, and obstacles that do not cause danger during the course of navigation
• Undersea cables and undersea pipelines
• Continental shelves
• Port areas, tariff-free areas, and tariff areas
• Fishing grounds
• Contiguous areas, exclusive economic areas, national territory areas, territorial sea, territorial sea baselines,
and administration areas
• Radar stations, radio stations, coastguard stations, rescue stations, and small-craft facilities

[-] objects:
• Updated objects

3-103 3 Basic Operation


d) Text (S-57/C-MAP Only)
The texts that will be displayed on the chart. You can turn the display of the following texts ON and OFF.
• vertical clearance of bridges, overhead cable or pipe etc.
• name or number of buoys, beacons, daymarks, light vessel, light float, offshore platform
• light description string
• note on chart data or natural publication
• nature of seabed
• geographic names
• value of magnetic variation, value of swept depth
• berth number
• national language text

Multi screen view statuses:


The top right square on the view panel shows how view is divided. The blue area is the display area for the
current view.
(For multi screen display, see 3.14.1 “Multi View Screen”)

Single view Top Bottom view Right Left view Right Top view

3 Basic Operation 3-104


(3) Setting the “View2” panel
The “View2” panel setting is used for the View 2 screen. This settings apply to the view 2 screen (the second
screen) which will be displayed when multi view function is used. The view 2 screen will not be displayed if
you use a single screen (normal screen). (For multi view function, see 3.14 “Displaying Chart in Various Ways
(Multi View/Wide View)”.)

1) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF.


Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel. 3
• The setting contents are the same as for “View 1” panel mentioned earlier.
The setting items are as follows:
1) Type (Type of chart)
2) SENC Version
3) Layer
4) Text

[“View2” panel]

3-105 3 Basic Operation


3.23.2 Setting Other Chart Options
1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(2) Other Charts] in that order.
The “Other Charts Option” panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF.
Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

3.23.3 Setting Scales


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(0) Option] - [(3) Scale] in that order.
The “Scale” panel opens.
2) Left-click the scale you want to turn ON and OFF.
Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

Memo:
The scales selected here will be displayed when you left-click the “Scale drop-down list” button on the
display panel. Also, when you select the scale from the menu, the scales selected here are shown actively.
While the scales that are not selected here will be displayed inactively.

3 Basic Operation 3-106


3.24 Setting the Alarm Options
You can set the various alarm options.

1) Select [MENU] - [(7) Alarm] - [(0) Option] in that order.


The “Alarm List Option” panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter the
value.
Then, left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
3

a) Limit
• Difference between Primary and Second:
Displays an alarm on the screen when the primary and Secondary positions have deviated by more than
the distance preset here.
• Shift of Primary Position
Displays an alarm on the screen when the movement distance per unit hour of the ship is larger than the
distance preset here. This is useful for detecting when something influences your ship’s position in such
a way that it is displayed at a wrong position on the chart. (This does not apply when Dead-Reckoning
(DR) is used.)
• Off Course (OffCo)
Displays an alarm on the screen when your ship has veered off the current course more than the preset
angle.

3-107 3 Basic Operation


• Early Course Change indication (ECC): WOL arrival alarm
• Arrival Last WP (Route): Last WP arrival alarm
• Timer: An alarm sounds at the time preset here.
• Vector: Danger detection vector in minute
• Sector: Guard ring radius in nm and the width in degree (up to 360 degrees)
*: For Vector and Sector, see 3.16.4 “Danger Detection Vector and Guard Ring”.

b) Area (S-57/C-MAP Only)


You can set whether or not to display an alarm on the screen when a symbol on the chart contacts a danger
detection vector by setting each of the items ON and OFF.
Subjects of the items are as follows:
• Traffic Separation Zone
• Traffic Crossing
• Traffic Roundabout
• Traffic Precautionary
• Two Way Traffic
• Deepwater Route
• Recommended Traffic Lane
• Inshore Traffic Zone
• Fairway
• Restricted Area
• Caution Area
• Shore Production Area
• Military Practice Area
• Seaplane Landing Area
• Submarine Transit Lane
• Ice Area
• Channel
• Fishing Ground
• Fishing Prohibited
• Pipeline Area
• Cable Area
• Anchorage Area
• Anchorage Prohibited
• Spoil Ground
• Dumping Ground
• Dredge Area
• Cargo Transshipment Area
• Incineration Area
• Special Protected Area

3 Basic Operation 3-108


3.25 Setting the View Options
You can set various options related to View menu.

3.25.1 Setting Radar Options


1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(1) Radar] in that order.
The “Radar Option” panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter the 3
value.
Left-click the [Close] button on the panel to fix the settings and close the panel.

Notes:
• For details on each setting item, refer to the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for Radar being used.
• The “Rader Option” panel will not be displayed if an optional radar board is not installed.

• IR (Interference Rejection)
• Echo Process:
When waves are rough, the echo caused by waves is displayed on the screen. This may prevent the ship’s
echo and other echoes from being easily seen. The echo process function uses signal processing to sup-
press echo caused by waves. To select, left-click the drop-down list button.
• Echo Color:
This drop-down list button sets the color of the radar echo. You can set one of four colors: green (default),
red, yellow and amber.
• Gain/Anti Sea Clutter/Anti Rain Clutter/Echo Brill
You can adjust these items from the keyboard (operation panel) using dials or using the “Radar Option”
panel.

3-109 3 Basic Operation


To Adjust the Radar Image Using the “Radar Option” Panel:
1) Left-click “Use This Dialog” to turn ON it.
2) Enter the value or select value with the scroll bar.
• If you left-click and turn ON “Auto”, automatic setting will apply.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the “Radar Option” panel.

Note: When you select “Use This Dialog”, you cannot use the [ECHO], [RAIN], [SEA] and [GAIN] dials
on the operation panel.

3 Basic Operation 3-110


3.25.2 Setting ARPA/AIS Options
1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(2) ARPA/AIS] in that order.
The “ARCS/AIS” Option panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter the value.
Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.

Note: For details on each setting item, refer to the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for ARPA/AIS to be used.
3

The following items can be set:


For the ARPA and AIS target symbols that will be displayed, see the next page.

a) ARPA/AIS Target
• Display Vector: Displays the vector for the ARPA/AIS targets.
• Display Track: Displays the track for the ARPA/AIS targets.
b) AIS Target
Display within Sector area:
• Distance: The AIS targets within the specified distance are displayed.
• Bearing: The AIS targets within the specified bearing are displayed.
Display within Guardring area:
• Radius: The AIS targets within the guardring are displayed. (Bearing is always 360 degrees.)

Heading line Sector area

Target Guardring area

Own ship

3-111 3 Basic Operation


AIS Danger Status
• CPA (Closest Point of Approach):
Determines that the AIS target is in danger of a collision, if the distance between the own ship and the
AIS target is within the set distance.
• TCPA (Time to Closest Point of Approach):
Determines that the AIS target is in danger of a collision, if the time to reach the own ship is within the
set time.
Display by Status
The followings are the filtering items to display the AIS targets. (In AIS, since the target object informa-
tion is sent from the other ships, you may received more than several hundred targets at a time, for ex-
ample. In such case, you may use this filtering function.)
• Sleeping: Target are not dangerous ones and are stopped (speed = 0).
• Activated: Target are not dangerous ones and are moving.
• Lost: Movement of the target is not detected within a certain period of time.

ARPA symbols:

Item Symbol

Tracked target

Dangerous target

Lost target

Initial acquisition mark

AIS symbols:

Item Symbol

Sleeping target

Activated target

Selected target

Dangerous target

Lost target

3 Basic Operation 3-112


3.25.3 Setting Analog Meter Options
How to set the analog meter options is explained in 3.15 “Using the Analog Meter”.
You can set the analog meter options by selecting [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(3) Analog Meter] in that
order.

3.25.4 Setting Logbook Options


How to set the logbook options is explained in 3.22.2 “Setting Logbook Options”. 3
You can set the logbook options by selecting [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(4) Logbook] in that order.

3.25.5 Clear Voyage Distance


1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(5) Clear Voyage Distance] in that order.
The “Voyage Distance Clear” panel opens.
2) Left-click the [OK] button, Voyage Distance is cleared.

3-113 3 Basic Operation


3.25.6 Setting Date/Time
When your ship is in the same time zone as the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), Time Zone is 0:00, and UTC
and ship’s local mean time (LMT) are the same.

1) Select [MENU] - [(4) View] - [(0) Option] - [(6) Date/Time] in that order.
The “Date/Time” panel opens.
2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter the
value.
Left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.

The following items can be set:


a) Source of UTC
• POS1: Application of UTC for POS1.
• POS2: Application of UTC for POS2.
• Internal Clock: Application of the internal clock that will be used for local date/time.
Left-click the set button to change the time.

b) Initial Time Zone


• Adjust by POS1/POS2: Time zone will be automatically adjusted according to POS1/POS2 system.
• Time: You can manually enter the difference in time.
Example of time entry:
You can also use [+30min] and [-30min] button to set time. (E = “+”, W = “-”)
The LMT and the time zone are displayed at the top of the display panel as follows:
LMT

Time zone

3 Basic Operation 3-114


3.26 Shifting Own Ship Position
During voyage, you can shift own ship’s position on the chart using one of the following methods:
• Shifts to the position designated by left-clicking the cursor (Cursor)
• Shifts by entering the latitude/longitude (Enter Position)
• Shifts by entering the offset value (Enter Offset)
Shifted own ship

Actual own ship


3

Caution: Do not use this function unless otherwise it is required since this function can conduct misoperation.
When own ship position is shifted by this function, the background color of the position panel on the
display panel changes to sky blue. So, be sure to check this color to check if your ship position is
shifted or not.

When own ship’s position is shifted, the color changes from gray to
sky blue.
To clear the offset and return to gray, select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] -
[(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.
However, offset is not cleared when Dead-Reckoning (DR) is used.

3.26.1 Shifting Using the Cursor


1) Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(1) Cursor] in that order.
The “Question” panel box opens.

2) Left-click the [OK] button.


The ship offset cursor appears.
3) Rotate the trackball and move the cursor to the position you
want, and then left-click there.
Own ship will shift to that position.

To clear the offset:


Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in
that order.
Ship offset cursor

3-115 3 Basic Operation


3.26.2 Shifting by Entering the Position
1) Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(2) Enter Position] in that order.
The “Enter Position” panel opens.
2) Enter the position and left-click the [OK] button.
Own ship will shift to that position.

To clear the offset:


Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] in that order.

3.26.3 Shifting by Entering the Offset Value


1) Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(3) Enter Offset] in that order.
The “Enter Offset” panel opens.
2) Enter the amount of offset to be shift and left-click the [OK] button.
Own ship will shift by the amount of offset entered.

Maximum amount of offset: 1 degree

3 Basic Operation 3-116


3.27 Canceling the Ship Offset
Select [MENU] - [(3) Ship] - [(1) Adjust] - [(4) Clear Offset] to cancel the ship offset.

3.28 Printing Out (Only when Connected to a Printer)


By using a printer connected to the workstation, you can print out dialog boxes, such as logbooks, or panels dis-
played on the screen. 3
1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(3) Print] in that order.
The “Print” panel opens.
2) Set for printing and left-click the [OK] button on the panel to close the panel.
Printing will starts.

3.29 Displaying the Startup Menu (Exit the ECDIS)


After the ECDIS is exited, the [Startup menu] will be displayed.
For the [Startup menu], see 3.3.2 “Selecting the Startup Menu.”

1) Select [MENU] and then [(0) Exit].


The “Question” panel will be displayed.
2) Left-click on the [OK] button.
ECDIS is exited, and the [Startup menu] will be displayed

3-117 3 Basic Operation


4
Route
Planning
In this Chapter, how to make a route is explained in 4.1. In addition, how to create alternate route during voyage is
explained in 4.2.
• For selecting the route you have made in this chapter, see 3.4 “Selecting ROUTE and To WP”.
• To set route options, see 4.1.1 “Setting the Route Options”.

4.1 Route Planning


You can make a route by using one of the following methods. After you have made a route, you can edit it. Edition
is possible by using either method.
• Route planning using the Table Editor
You can make a route by entering each WP value in the WP entry table. Using the [View Sync] button, the
current WP can always be displayed on the chart during editing.
• Route planning using the Graphic Editor
You can make a route by graphically drawing each WP on the chart.

Editing Screen and Editing Menu:


When you enter the Table Editing mode or Graphic Editing mode from the normal menu, the editing screen is
displayed.
On the editing screen, editing buttons are displayed. Further, special editing menu is provided and it opens by left-
clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the same way as for normal menu.
The editing button functions are included in this special menu, though some names of buttons are slightly different
from those of menus.

Note: The special editing menu has the same menus as for normal menu. Explanation of these menus is omit-
ted in this Chapter.

Route Type:
Normal type or ANTS type route can be made. After you have made a route using the Normal type, you can convert
it into the ANTS type, and vice versa.

Note: When converting the Normal type into ANTS type, the items that are not included in the Normal type
become default values. When converting the ANTS type into Normal type, conversion will be made com-
pletely.

[Normal Type] [ANTS Type]

4 Route Planning 4-2


Route Name and File Type:
Route Name: You can enter up to 8 characters. For example: Route-01
The extension (3 additional letters) is automatically attached to the route name as follows to distinguish the route
type.
For Normal type: Route-01.rtn
For ANTS type: Route-01.rta

Route shown on the Screen:

WP0
4
Planned speed
[kts]

Planned course

Port side (in red line)


and port side width
(0.5 nm as a default value)
WP1

Leg

Arrival radius

Starboard side (in green line) and starboard side width


(0.5 nm as a default value)

Note: For each default value, see 4.1.1 “Setting the Route Options”.

4-3 4 Route Planning


4.1.1 Setting the Route Options

1) In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(0) Option] in that order.
or
In the Table Editing menu, select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(0) Option] in that order.
Then, the “Route Plan Option” panel opens.

(Normal Menu)

or

(Table Editing Menu)

2) Left-click the setting items to set them ON and OFF, and, for the items that require value entry, enter the
value, if necessary. Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
a) Default
• Width Prt: Port side width
• Width Stb: Starboard side width
• Arr Radius: Arrival radius
• Speed: Planned ship’s speed
• Sail: RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)
• Turn Rate: Turn rate
• Turn Radius: Turn radius
• Time Zone: Time zone
b) Max Latitude
Maximum latitude
c) Check Safety in Editing
During editing the route, safety check is automatically conducted.
(You can manually conduct safety check with the [Safety Check] button or from the menu in the
editing mode.)

4 Route Planning 4-4


4.1.2 Route Planning Using the Table Editor
The order of explanation here is as follows:
• About the Table Editing mode
• Table editing menu and button functions
• Operation flowchart
• Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Table Editor can be edited with the Graphic Editor.

Note: The system requires to enter any route with WGS-84.

4.1.2.1 Table Editing Mode


4
In the normal menu, selecting [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(1) Table Editor] in that order will
open the Table Editing screen as shown below:
On this screen you can make or edit the route.

[Table Editing Screen]

Opening the Table Editing Menu:


Left-clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the Table Editing mode will open the special menu
for Table Editor.

4-5 4 Route Planning


4.1.2.2 Table Editing Menu and Button Functions (Table Editor)
(1) Table editing menu
The following shows each menu in the Table Editing mode:
For the menu items that are the same as in the normal menu, explanation is omitted. See 3 “Basic Operation”.

(1) File
Same button operation:
[New]
[Open]
[Save]
[Save] (When making a new file)
[Print]
[Close]

(2) Edit
Same button operation:
[Insert]
[Delete]
[Divide] (for GC leg)
No button
No button

[(3) Divide GC Leg]:


The selected GC leg can be divided by the specified condition, either latitude or nm.
[(4) Set Default]:
The WP being selected in the Table Edit mode is reset to the default values.
[(5) Sort Reversely]:
The order of WPs is reversed. Namely, the WP0 to WPn in the table and chart are reversed.
To return to the normal order, set this item to OFF.

(3) Cursor

4 Route Planning 4-6


(4) Chart

(5) View

Same button operation:


[View Sync]

(6) Alarm

(7) Tool
Same button operation:
[Safety Check]
[Limit Check]

See 4.1.1 “Setting the Route Options”.

4-7 4 Route Planning


(2) Button functions

Left-click to close the route file and exit the Table Editing mode.

Left-click when making a new route file.

Left-click to recall a route file previously made.

Left-click when saving the route file currently made.

Left-click when printing the WP contents.

Left-click when inserting a new WP.

Left-click when deleting a WP.

Divide the GC leg.

Left-click when checking the safety of the route. As a result of the checking, warning
dialog box will appear if the route is not safety.

Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).

Left-click when you want to display the WP during editing.

Left-click the drop-down list button to left-click one of the items. The Name column
contents in the editing table change according to the selected item.

Name: You can enter name in the Name column.


WP to WP: WP to WP information is displayed.
Total: WP0 to WPn information is displayed.

4 Route Planning 4-8


4.1.2.3 Operation Flowchart for Table Editor
The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Table Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you recall a route file
previously made, though the table editing operation is the same.

(1) Making a new route file (Table Editor)

Start

Clear any route if Left-click to select [UNLOAD].


4
displayed.

Enter the Table


In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(1)
Editing mode.
Table Editor] in that order.

Left-click [New]. Open a new route file.

Select route type. Select Normal or ANTS.

Table editing operation

WP0 entry WP0 entry screen


Position (Lat./Lon.)

Left-click the next


WP No.

The following items are automatically


WP1 entry
displayed. Change, if necessary.
Position (Lat./Lon.)
• Width (Prt/Stb)
• Arr Rad
• Speed [kts]
Repeat WP entry until
• Sail (RL/GC)
the final WP.
• Time Zone
• Name

Left-click [Save]

If you want, you can change


Enter the file name.
the route type to another one.

Left-click [Close] Exits the Table Editing mode.

End

4-9 4 Route Planning


(2) Editing the route file (Table Editor)

Start

Clear any route if Left-click [UNLOAD].


displayed.

Enter the Table In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(1)
Editing mode. Table Editor] in that order.

Left-click [Open]. Select a route file you want to edit.

Displays ANTS route files.


Displays Normal route files.

Table editing operation

Edit the WP table.

When you want to change the file


name.

To save without chang- Left-click [Save as]


Left-click [Save] in the menu.
ing the file name.

Enter the new file If you want, you can


name. change the route type to an-
other one.

Left-click [Close] Exits the Table Editing mode.

End

4 Route Planning 4-10


4.1.2.4 Making a New Route File (Table Editor)
This explanation is made according to (1) “New route file making” in 4.1.2.3 “Operation Flowchart for Table
Editor”.

(1) Clearing the route before starting


Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any route
on the screen.
• You can also clear the route by the following menu operation.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(2) Clear Route] in that order.
4
(2) Entering the Table Editing mode
1) In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(1) Table Editor] in that order.
Then, the Table Editing screen opens. [MENU] Button

• When you open the Table Editing menu, left-click the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or left-click
any position on the chart.

[Table Editing Menu]

(3) Opening a new route file


1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
The “Select Route Type” panel opens.

2) Left-click either “Normal” or “ANTS”, and then left-click the [OK] button.
Now you can enter WPs.

4-11 4 Route Planning


(4) Making a route
1) Left-click the “Latitude” and “Longitude” in the position column, and enter the position for WP0.

2) Left-click the next WP No. (i.e., WP1).


Then, the same position as the previous WP (i.e. WP0) is automatically set in the position column. Also,
default values are displayed in the other columns.

[Items shown in the table]


Position: Latitude/Longitude
Width Prt: Port side width
Width Stb: Starboard side width
Arr Rad: Arrival radius
Speed [kts]: Ship’s speed
Sail RL/GC: Sail RL (Rhumb line)/GC (Great circle)
Time Zone: Time zone
Name: Comment entry column.
The contents of column are changed by left-clicking the [Name] drop-down list button and
then [Normal], [WP to WP], or [Total].

Normal: You can enter a comment.


WP to WP: The Name column changes as follows:

Cse: Course to the next WP


Dist: Distance to the next WP
TTG: Estimated time of arrival to
the next WP

Total: The Name column changes as follows:

Cse: Course to the next WP


Dist: Distance to the next WP
ETA: Estimated time of arrival to
the WP from WP0

4 Route Planning 4-12


[Entry example: The route displayed on the chart corresponds to the list data.]

Entering GC/RL:
To enter a sailing method, you must enter a letter G (for GC) or a letter R (for RL). Press the [GHI] key once
to enter GC, and press the [PQR] key three times to enter RL.

Press the [PQR] key three times.

Press the [GHI] key once.

4-13 4 Route Planning


(5) Saving the route file
1) Left-click the [Save] button.
The “Save as Route File” panel opens.

2) Perform one of the following operations.


When saving without changing the route type:
• Enter the route file name and comment.
• Next, left-click the [OK] button, then proceed to step 3).

When changing the route type:


• Enter the route file name and comment.
• Next, left-click another route type, and then the [OK] button.
If you change the route type from Normal to ANTS, the following “Route Plan Option” panel opens.
Perform the following “How to change the route type (from Normal to ANTS), and then proceed to step
3).
If you change the route type from ANTS to Normal, type conversion will be made without opening any
dialog box. So, simply proceed to step 3).

How to change the route type (from Normal to ANTS):


1) In the “Route Plan Option” panel, left-click the se-
lectable items and enter the value into the value entry
box, if you want to change the default values, etc.
For details of each item, see 4.1.1 “Setting the Route
Options”.

2) After setting, left-click the [OK] button.

Note: This panel will be displayed only when you


change the route type from “Normal” to
“ANTS”.

3) Left-click the [Close] button.


The “Question” dialog box will be displayed for confirming the file operation. Left-click “Y (Yes)” to
close the file. Then, the system exit the Table Editing mode and the list and table editing buttons are
cleared from the screen.

4 Route Planning 4-14


How to edit in the Table Editing Menu:

Left-click WP No. 2, for example, and then left-click the [Insert] button.
Then, the new WP will be added to the WP No. 2, and the WP2 and later WPs will
move by one line downwardly.

Left-click WP No. 2, for example, and then left-click the [Delete] button.
Then, the WP2 is deleted and WP3 and later WPs will move by one line upwardly.

After entering WP(s), left-click the [Safety Check] button to check the safety.
The “Route Waring Check” panel opens. Left-click “Select Leg” or “All Leg” and left
click the [OK] button. (When you use “Select Leg”, you should select a WP to be
checked beforehand.)

If safety problem dose not arise, the following dialog box will be displayed.
[For “Select Leg” ]

[For “All Leg” ]

(to be continued)

4-15 4 Route Planning


How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:

If the following dialog box is displayed, you should modify the route.
The leg warned is displayed in red in the table. Left-click the [OK] button, then the leg
is displayed in red on the chart.
To return the WP No. to the normal color, left-click the WP No.

Shown in red

Shown in red

You can make a route while watching the WP on the chart. For example, above chart is
made with the [View Sync] button left-clicked to set it ON.

Left-click to check if the route exceeds the limit (leg length, etc.).

4 Route Planning 4-16


How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:

Same as [Divide GC Leg] in the menu and this button is effective only when “GC” is
selected in “Sail” in the “Route Plan Option” panel. (See 4.1.1 “Setting the Route
Options”.)
1) Left-click the WP with GC leg you want to divide in the WP table. (When you want
to divide the leg between WP2 and WP3, select WP3.)
Then, the “Divide Route WP2 to WP3” will open.

• Every (Lon): Divides the GC leg every specified longitude value.


• Every: Divides the GC leg every specified distance.
2) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the leg is divided according to the setting. (Note that the divided leg type is
changed from “GC” to “RL”.)

(Before dividing)

(After dividing)

4-17 4 Route Planning


How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:

[Editing the Course and Distance in the “WP to WP” display mode]

In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[WP to WP]. You can edit the values of Cse (Course to the next WP) and Dist (Distance
to the next WP) columns.

Example:
In the following example, the Cse and Dist for the WP1 are modified. As a result, the
position of the WP2 changes according to this modification. Since the position of the
WP2 changes, the Cse and Dist values of WP2 for WP3 also change.
WP2 (After modification)

WP3

WP1
WP2 (Before modification)

[Editing the ETA in the “Total” display mode]

In the Table Editing mode, left-click the following drop-down list button and select
[Total]. You can edit the value of ETA (Estimated time of arrival to the WP from WP0)
column.

When you edit the WPn’s ETA, the ETA and ETD of WP0 to WPn-1 are calculated
based on the WPn’s ETA, and the calculated ETA values are displayed in the table.

4 Route Planning 4-18


How to edit in the Table Editing Menu -- Continued:

[Sort Reversely] In the Table Editing mode, select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(5) Sort Reversely] in that
order. Then, the WPs in the list and chart are displayed in the reverse order.

4-19 4 Route Planning


4.1.2.5 Recalling a Previous Route File (Table Editor)
This explanation is made according to (2) “Editing the route file” in 4.1.2.3 “Operation Flowchart for Table Edi-
tor”.

(1) Clearing the route before starting


Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any route
on the screen.
• You can also clear the route by the following menu operation.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(2) Clear Route] in that order.

(2) Entering the Table Editing mode


1) In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(1) Table Editor] in that order.
• When you open the Table Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Table Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or left-click
any position on the chart.
[Table Editing Menu]

(3) Recalling the route file


1) To recall the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
The “Open Route File” panel opens.

• To display the Normal type route files, left-click the [Normal] to set it ON.
• To display the ANTS type route files, left-click the [ANTS] to set it ON.
2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the recalled file opens on the screen. Now you can edit the file in the same way as when you make
a new route file.

(4) Saving the route file


When saving without changing the file name:
1) Left-click the [Save] button.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Table Editing mode.

4 Route Planning 4-20


When saving as the new file:
1) Select [Menu] - [(1) File] - [(4) Save As] in the order.
The “Same as Route File” panel opens.
2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
• If you want to change the route type, change it to another one. For detailed description, see 4.1.2.4- (5)
“Saving the route file”.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.

4.1.2.6 Importing Route Files

(1) Importing Normal Route Files


4
Import normal route files that were exported from JAN-901. In the Edit menu, select [MENU] - [(1) File] -
[(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order, and then use the “Open” panel to select the name of a file to be
imported. Only routes having a file name starting with “rtn_” can be selected. The name of the file to be
opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file
import (for route export, see 4.1.2.7 “Exporting Route Files”).

(2) Importing ANTS Route Files


Import ANTS route files that were exported from JAN-901. In the Edit menu, select [MENU] - [(1) File] -
[(3) Import] - [(2) ANTS] in that order, and then use the “Open” panel to select the name of a file to be
imported. Only routes having a file name starting with “rta_” can be selected. The name of the file to be
opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file
import (for route export, see 4.1.2.7 “Exporting Route Files”).

CSV format:
For each WP of a route, a file
containing a data row is created.
Data are divided by a comma
in this file. You can use
Microsoft EXCEL to edit this
file.

4-21 4 Route Planning


(3) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models
Import CSV format route files created with other ECDIS models (JAN-1100, JAN-1290, JAN-1397, and
JAN-3598) we offer. In the Edit menu, select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G ANTS] in that order,
and then use the “Open” panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file to be opened
will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button to start file import.

4.1.2.7 Exporting Route Files


Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format. In the Edit menu, select [MENU] - [(1)
File] - [(6) Export] in that order, and then use the “Save As” panel to select the name of a file to be exported. If a
route file to be exported already has a name, save it as “rtn_[route name].csv” if it is for a normal route, or save it as
“rta_[route name].csv” if it is for an ANTS route. If you wish to change the file name, follow the naming rules such
as “rtn_[route name].csv (normal route)” and “rta_[route name].csv (ANTS route).” Left-click on the [OK] button
to save the route file under the name displayed in the file name box.

Example:
When exporting a file “test.rtn,” its name will
be set to “rtn_test.csv.”

4 Route Planning 4-22


4.1.3 Route Planning Using the Graphic Editor
The order of explanation here is as follows:
• About the Graphic Editing mode
• Graphic editing menu and button functions
• Operation flowchart
• Detailed operation
The route you have made with the Graphic Editor can be edited with the Table Editor.

Note: The system requires to enter any route with WGS-84.

The file operation using [New], [Open], [Save] and [Close] button is the same as for Table Editor. In the Graphic
4
Editor, you can make a route graphically by positioning the WPs. The position (latitude/longitude) of the cursor is
shown on the bottom of the display panel for your reference. After you have entered the WP, you can move the WP
with the [Move] button or edit the WP position with the [Info] button. Also, the route you have made can be edited
with the Table Editor.
For positioning the WPs, you can also use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel.

4.1.3.1 Graphic Editing Mode


In the normal menu, selecting [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order will
open the Graphic Editing screen as shown below:
On this screen you can make or edit the route graphically.

[Graphic Editing Screen]

Opening the Graphic Editing Menu:


Left-clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the Graphic Editing mode will open the special
menu for Graphic Editor.

4-23 4 Route Planning


4.1.3.2 Graphic Editing Menu and Button Functions (Graphic Editor)
(1) Graphic editing menu
The following shows each menu in the Graphic Editing mode:
For the menu items that are the same as in the normal menu, explanation is omitted. See 3 “Basic Operation”.

(1) File

Same button operation:


[New]
[Open]
[Save]
[Save] (When making a new file)
[Print]
[Close]

(2) Edit
Same button operation:
[Select]
[Add]
[Insert]
[Move]
[Delete]
Undo the deletion operation
Set to ON for using the EBL/VRM on the operation panel.
Divide GC Leg
Sort Reversely
[Info]

[(8) Divide GC Leg]:


The selected GC leg can be divided by the specified condition, either latitude or nm.
[(9) Sort Reversely]:
The order of WPs is reversed. Namely, the WP0 to WPn in the chart are reversed.
To return to the normal order, set this item to OFF.

(3) Cursor

4 Route Planning 4-24


(4) Chart

(5) View

(6) Alarm

(7) Tool

Same as the [Safety check] button in the Table Editing mode


Calculate distance to run

See 4.1.1 “Setting the Route Options”.

4-25 4 Route Planning


(2) Button functions

Left-click to exit the Graphic Editing mode.

Left-click when making a new route file.

Left-click to recall a route file previously made.

Left-click when saving the route file currently made.

Left-click when printing the WP contents.

Left-click when terminating the current editing operation or when selecting the WP or leg.

Left-click when adding a WP to the WP0 or the to the last WP.

Left-click when inserting a WP in the course of the route.

Left-click when moving a WP.

Left-click when deleting a WP.

Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected WP or leg.

4 Route Planning 4-26


4.1.3.3 Operation Flowchart for Graphic Editor
The following shows the general flowchart for planning a route using the Graphic Editor.
File opening and saving operation differs depending on whether you make a new route file or you recall a route file
previously made, though the graphic editing operation is the same. The file opening and saving operation is the
same as when using the Table Editor.

(1) Making a new route file (Graphic Editor)


Start
: The same procedure as for the Table Editor.

Clear any route if Left-click to select [UNLOAD].


4
displayed.

Enter the Graphic


In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(2)
Editing mode.
Graphic Editor] in that order.

Left-click [New]. Open a new route file.

Select route type. Select Normal or ANTS.

Graphic editing operation

WP0 entry
(using the cursor)

Next WP entry
(using the cursor)

Repeat WP entry until


the final WP.

Left-click [Save]

If you want, you can change


Enter the file name.
the route type to another one.

Left-click [Close] Exits the Graphic Editing mode.

End

4-27 4 Route Planning


(2) Editing the route file (Graphic Editor)

Start : The same procedure as for the Table Editor.

Clear any route if Left-click [UNLOAD].


displayed.

Enter the Graphic In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(2)
Editing mode. Graphic Editor] in that order.

Left-click [Open]. Select a route file you want to edit.

Displays ANTS route files.


Displays Normal route files.

Graphic editing operation

Edit the WP.

When you want to change the file


name.

To save without chang- Left-click [Save as]


Left-click [Save] ing the file name. in the menu.

Enter the new file If you want, you can


name. change the route type to an-
other one.

Left-click [Close] Exits the Graphic Editing mode.

End

4 Route Planning 4-28


4.1.3.4 Making a New Route File (Graphic Editor)
This explanation is made according to (1) “Making a new route file” in 4.1.3.3 “Operation Flowchart for Graphic
Editor”.

(1) Clearing the route before starting


Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any route
on the screen.
• You can also clear the route by the following menu operation.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(2) Clear Route] in that order.
4
(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode
1) In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.
[MENU] Button

• When you open the Graphic Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or left-
click any position on the chart.

[Graphic Editing Menu]

(3) Opening a new route file


1) To make a new route file, left-click the [New] button.
The “Select Route Type” panel opens.
2) Left-click either “Normal” or “ANTS”, and then the [OK] button.
Now you can enter WPs.

How to save the route:


The route file saving operation is exactly the same as for Table Editor.
See (5) “Saving a route file” in 4.1.2.4 “Making a New Route File (Table Editor)”.

4-29 4 Route Planning


(4) Making a route
Making a route using buttons on the screen:
The following shows the way how to make a route using the buttons on the screens. (You can mix the EBL/
VRM operation with this button operation. See 4.1.3.8 “Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials”.)
Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.

Note: When [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is off, operations are conducted without EBL/VRM. When it is on (with
a checkmark), operations are conducted with EBL/VRM. Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(7) Use
EBL/VRM] in that order to turn it off.

Check to see if there is a checkmark.

1) Entering WPs:
Left-click at the WP (WP0) position and rotate the trackball to move the cursor to the next WP (WP1).
Then, left-click there.
[WP0 fixing/WP0 to WP1] [WP1 fixing]

[WP1 to WP2] [WP2 fixing]

4 Route Planning 4-30


How to shift the chart during entering WPs:
Left-click on the chart and hold the button down, and then move the cursor to scroll the chart while
entering WPs.

2) Terminating WP entry:
Left-click the [Select] button to terminate WP entry. (You can also terminate the operation by selecting
[Abort] after right-clicking the trackball.)

[Left-clicking [Select] to stop entry] [The route you have entered]

Creating routes using EBL/VRM:


Check [(7) Use EBL/VRM] by selecting [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(7) Use EBL/VRM] in that order. The EBL/
VRM intersection becomes an entering position instead of a cursor.

Entering position

First, left-click on the center of EBL/ Then, decide where the EBL/VRM
VRM. intersection will be and left-click on it.

4-31 4 Route Planning


How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu:

Deleting the WP:


1) Left-click a WP you want to delete. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select]
button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Delete] button. Then, the selected WP is deleted.

[Select WP3.] [WP3 is deleted.]

Adding a WP to the WP0 or to the last WP:


1) Left-click the WP0 or the last WP. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select]
button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Add] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for additional
WP. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WP.
3) Left-click the [Select] button to terminate the adding operation.

[Select WP2 (the last WP).] [WP3 is added.]

4 Route Planning 4-32


How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:

Moving a WP (other than WP0 and the last WP):


1) Left-click a WP you want to move. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select]
button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Move] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for moving
the WP. Then, left-click the cursor to fix the WP.

[Select WP2.] [Move WP2.] [WP2 is moved.]


4

Inserting a new WP between WPs:


1) Left-click the leg you want to insert a new WP there. (If you cannot select the leg, left-
click the [Select] button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Insert] button and rotate the trackball to insert a new WP. Then, left-
click the cursor to fix the WP. A new WP is inserted and the number of the later WPs is
increased by 1.

[Select the leg.] [Make a new WP.] [New WP is inserted as WP2.]

4-33 4 Route Planning


How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:

Displaying/Modifying information of WP or leg:


1) Left-click a WP or leg you want to know about it. (If you cannot select the WP or leg,
left-click the [Select] button before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Info] button.
Then, the “Edit Way Point No.xx” panel is displayed.
Enter the value if you want to change. You can enter a name for the WP. If you want to
return each value to the default value, left-click the [Default] button. (The default
value is set in the “Route Plan Option” panel. See 4.1.1.)
After setting, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
[Information for WP2.] [Information for Leg.]

[Calculate Distance to Run]


You can calculate the distance between WPs or between own ship and a WP with the
calculator (“Calculating Distance” panel).
1) In the Graphic Editing menu, select [MENU] - [(7) Tool] - [(2) Calculate Distance to
Run] in the order.
Then, the “Calculating Distance” panel opens.
2) Left-click the “Way Point” drop-down list button of the “From” panel and left-click
either “Way Point” or “Own Ship”. Next, left-click the WP No. drop-down list button
of the “From” panel and left-click the WP number you want.
3) Left-click the “WP No” drop-down list button of the “To” panel and left-click the WP
number you want. Then, calculation is automatically made and the result is displayed
in the “Distance” box. Left-click [Close] to close the panel.

[Select WP/Own Ship.] [Select WP No.] [Resultant]

4 Route Planning 4-34


How to edit in the Graphic Editing Menu -- Continued:

[Divide GC Leg] This menu is effective only when “GC” is selected in “Sail” in the “Route Plan Option”
panel. (See 4.1.1 “Setting the Route Options”.)
1) Left-click the GC leg you want to divide.
2) Select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(8) Divide GC Leg] in that order.
Then, the “Divide Route WPn-1 to WPn” will open.

• Every (Lon): Divides the GC leg every specified longitude value.


• Every: Divides the GC leg every specified distance.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the leg is divided according to the setting. (Note that the divided leg type is
changed from “GC” to “RL”.)

(Before dividing)

(After dividing)

4-35 4 Route Planning


4.1.3.5 Recalling a Previous Route File (Graphic Editor)
This explanation is made according to (2) “Editing the route file” in 4.1.3.3 “Operation Flowchart for Graphic
Editor”.

(1) Clearing the route before starting


Before starting, left-click the ROUTE drop-down button on the
display panel, and then left-click the [UNLOAD] to clear any route
on the screen.
• You can also clear the route by the following menu operation.
In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(2) Clear Route] in that order.

(2) Entering the Graphic Editing mode


1) In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(5) Planning] - [(2) Graphic Editor] in that order.
• When you open the Graphic Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Graphic Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or left-
click any position on the chart.
[Graphic Editing Menu]

(3) Recalling the route file


1) To recall the route file, left-click the [Open] button.
The “Open Route File” panel opens.

• To display the Normal type route files, left-click the [Normal] to set it ON.
• To display the ANTS type route files, left-click the [ANTS] to set it ON.
2) Select a route file you want to edit, and left-click the [OK] button.
Then, the recalled file opens on the screen. Now you can edit the file in the same way as when you make
a new route file.

(4) Saving the route file


When saving without changing the file name:
1) Left-click the [Save] button.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Graphic Editing mode.

4 Route Planning 4-36


When saving as the new file:
1) Select [Menu] - [(1) File] - [(4) Save As] in the order.
The “Same as Route File” panel opens.
2) Enter the new file name and comment, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
• If you want to change the route type, change it to another one. For detailed description, see 4.1.2.4- (5)
“Saving the route file”.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the file.

4.1.3.6 Importing Route Files

(1) Importing Normal Route Files


4
Import CSV format normal route files that were exported from JAN-901. In the Graphic Editing menu, select
[MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(1) Normal] in that order, and then use the “Open” panel to select the
name of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file name starting with “rtn_” can be selected. The name
of the file to be opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK]
button to start file import (for route export, see 4.1.3.7 “Exporting Route Files”).

(2) Importing ANTS Route Files


Import CSV format ANTS route files that were exported from JAN-901. In the Graphic Editing menu, select
[MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(2) ANTS] in that order, and then use the “Open” panel to select the name
of a file to be imported. Only routes having a file name starting with “rta_” can be selected. The name of the
file to be opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Left-click on the [OK] button
to start file import (for route export, see 4.1.3.7 “Exporting Route Files”).

4-37 4 Route Planning


(3) Importing Route Files Created with Other ECDIS Models
Import CSV format route files created with other ECDIS models (JAN-1100, JAN-1290, JAN-1397, and
JAN-3598) we offer. In the Graphic Editing menu, select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] - [(3) 2G ANTS]
in that order, and then use the “Open” panel to select the name of a file to be imported. The name of the file
to be opened will be displayed in the file name box after selecting the file. Press the [OK] button to start file
import.

4.1.3.7 Exporting Route Files


Save newly created route files or already opened route files in CSV format. In the Graphic Editing menu, select
[MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Export] in that order, and then use the “Save As” panel to select the name of a file to be
exported. If a route file to be exported already has a name, save it as “rtn_[route name].csv” if it is for a normal
route, or save it as “rta_[route name].csv” if it is for an ANTS route. If you wish to change the file name, follow the
naming rules such as “rtn_[route name].csv (normal route)” and “rta_[route name].csv (ANTS route).” Left-click
on the [OK] button to save the route file under the name displayed in the file name box.

Example:
When exporting a file “test.rtn,” its name will
be set to “rtn_test.csv.”

4 Route Planning 4-38


4.1.3.8 Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials
The following shows the way how to make a route using the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel.
(You can mix the EBL/VRM operation with the button operation on the screen mentioned earlier.)

Note: Before starting, be sure that [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is set to ON. If not, select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] -
[(7) Use EBL/VRM] in that order to set it ON.

4
Be sure that the check mark is attached.

The EBL cursor is displayed on the screen. (The cursor type changes when [(7) Use EBL/VRM] is set to
ON.) Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.

1) Press the [EBL1], [EBL2], [VRM1], or [VRM2] key on the operation panel.

2) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.

Left-click

4-39 4 Route Planning


3) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the planned WP0, and left-click there.

WP0

Left-click

4) Move the cursor to the voluntary point. (e.g. cape) and left-click there.

(This circle is not displayed.) (This circle is not displayed.)

WP0 WP0

Left-click

4 Route Planning 4-40


5) Turn the EBL/VRM dial to move the point of intersection to the next WP (WP1), and left-click there.

(This circle is not displayed.)

WP0

Left-click

WP0

184.0 1000

WP1

Green line
(Starboard side) Red line
(Port side)

6) Follow the steps 4) and 5) until you make the final WP.

How to Edit the Route:


After pressing the [Add], [Move], or [Insert] button on the screen, you can add, move, or insert a WP in the
same EBL/VRM operation as above.

4-41 4 Route Planning


4.2 Creating an Alternate Route
During voyage only, you can create an alternate route while referring to the current route on the screen. The alter-
nate route can be saved as a TEMP file, or by naming a new route name.
The alternate route can be created in the same manner as for making a route using the Graphic Editor. The operation
buttons and the special menu for creating an alternate route are exactly the same as those for the Graphic Editor. So,
the same explanation is omitted here. For omitted information, see 4.1.3 “Route Planning Using the Graphic Edi-
tor”. You can use EBL/VRM in the same way as for the Graphic Editor, though the explanation is omitted here.

Note:
Whether the alternate route is replaced with the original route or not depends the saving methods.
• When you left-click the [Save] button and then [Close] button after you made the alternate route, the original
route is replaced with the alternate route. (In this case, the alternate route file name is “TEMP”.)
Normally, you will use this method for alternate route.
• When you saved as a new file using the “Save as” menu, the alternate route is not replaced with the original
route. (For details, see 4.2.2-(3) “Saving the alternate route file”.)

4.2.1 Operation Flowchart

Start

During voyage
(Route is displayed.) Be sure that the current route is displayed on the screen.

Enter Create Alternate In the normal menu, select [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(4) Create Alternate Route] in
Route mode. that order.

Create the alternate route in the same manner as for the Graphic Editor.
To create an alternative route, you will use the following buttons.

Alternate route
making operation

: For [Info] button, see 4.1.3 “Route Planning Using the


Graphic Editor”.

Left-click the [Save] The original route is replaced with the alternate route.
button. (If you simply want to save the alternate route file and you are not intending to
replace the route, you should use “Save as” menu. In this case, the original route
remains as it is. For details, see 4.2.2-(3) “Saving the alternate route file”.)

Left-click [Close] Exits the Alternate Route Creating mode.

End

4 Route Planning 4-42


4.2.2 Creating Alternate Route
The following two charts show the original route and the altered route, respectively. You will see that, during
creating alternate route, the alternate route is displayed together with the original route.
In this example, the following WPs are altered:
• Position of WP1 (Moved)
• WP2 (Inserted. So, the number of the later WPs is increased by 1.)
• WP6 (Added one WP to the last WP.)
You will learn how to accomplish these alterations.

[Original Route]
4

[Original Route and Created Alternate Route]

WP6:
Added to the last WP.

Alternate Route

WP1:
Position changed.

WP2:
Inserted.

4-43 4 Route Planning


(1) Alternate Route Editing mode
In the normal menu, selecting [MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(4) Create Alternate Route] in that order will open the
Alternate Route Editing screen as shown below: (This screen is the same as for Graphic Editor.)

[Alternate Route Editing Screen] [MENU] Button

Opening the Alternate Route Editing Menu:


Left-clicking the [MENU] button on the display panel in the Alternate Route Editing mode will open the
special menu for Alternate Route Editor. (This menu is the same as for Graphic Editor.)

(2) Creating Alternate Route


The following shows the way how to make an alternate route using the buttons on the screens. (When you use
the EBL/VRM on the operation panel, see 4.1.3.8 “Making a Route Using EBL/VRM”.
Operate while watching the cursor position displayed at the bottom of the display panel.

4 Route Planning 4-44


Moving the WP for Alternate Route:
1) Left-click WP1 to move it. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select] button before starting
operation.)
2) Left-click the [Move] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for moving WP1. Then, left-click
to fix the new WP1 for the alternate route.

[Select WP1.] [Move WP1.]

[Fix the new WP1 for alternate route.]


How to shift the chart during making an alter-
nate route:
Left-click on the chart and hold the button down,
and then move the cursor to scroll the chart while
creating alternate routes.

Moved new WP (WP1).


Alternate route is created.

4-45 4 Route Planning


Inserting the WP for Alternate Route:
1) Left-click the leg between WP1 and WP2. (If you cannot select the leg, left-click the [Select] button
before starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Insert] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for inserting a new WP. Then, left-
click to fix the WP. New WP2 is inserted and the number of the later WPs is increased by 1.

[Select the leg.] [Left-click the [Insert] button.]

[Position the new WP2.] [New WP is inserted as WP2.]

Inserted WP (WP2).

4 Route Planning 4-46


Adding the WP for Alternate Route:
You can add the WP to the first WP or to the last WP.
1) Left-click the last WP. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select] button before starting opera-
tion.)
2) Left-click the [Add] button and rotate the trackball to move the cursor for additional WP. Then, left-click
to fix the WP.
3) Left-click the [Select] button to terminate the adding operation.

[Select the last WP.] [Position the new last WP.]

[WP6 is added as the last WP.]

Added WP (WP6).

4-47 4 Route Planning


Deleting the WP from Alternate Route:
You can delete a WP.
1) Left-click a WP you want to delete. (If you cannot select the WP, left-click the [Select] button before
starting operation.)
2) Left-click the [Delete] button. The selected WP will be deleted.
(In the example, WP2 is deleted. You can also delete any WP of the alternate route, such as WP3.)

[Select WP2.] [WP2 is deleted.]

You can use this button to display and edit the selected WP and leg. For details, see (4)
“Making a route” in 4.1.3.4 “Making a New Route File (Graphic Editor)”.

[Calculate Distance to Run]:


Select [MENU], [(7) Tool], and then [(2) Calculate Distance to Run] in Alternate Route Edit mode for auto-
matic calculations of distance between WPs or distance to a WP (“Calculating Distance” panel). For details,
see (4) “Making a route” in 4.1.3.4 “Making a New Route File (Graphic Editor)”.

4 Route Planning 4-48


(3) Saving the alternate route file

a) When saving without changing the file name ([Save] button):

Note: In this case, the file is saved as “TEMP”, and, when you close the file, the alternate route “TEMP”
becomes the new route. Namely, the original route is replaced with the alternate route “TEMP”.

1) Left-click the [Save] button.


Then, the alternate route file is save as “TEMP”.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.
Then, the original route on the screen is replaced with the alternate route “TEMP”. 4
b) When saving as the new file ([Save as] menu):

Note: In this case, the file is saved as the name you given, and, even when you close the file, the original
route is maintained. Namely, the route is not replaced with the alternate route.

1) In the Alternate Route Editing menu, select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(4) Save As] in the order.
The “Save as Route File” panel opens.

2) Enter the file name and comment.


3) Select route type if you want to change the type. For details, see (5) “Saving the route file” in 4.1.2.4
“Making a New Route File (Table Editor)”.
4) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
5) Left-click the [Close] button to exit the Alternate Route Editing mode.

4-49 4 Route Planning


5
Chart Editing
This chapter describes how to create user charts and how to manually update charts.

User Charts
User charts can be created and displayed on other charts. User chart information contains various objects (symbols,
lines, areas, and texts). User charts can also be edited and updated. Also, you can merge multiple charts together to
create one user chart.
The following figures show how to use user charts:

Example 1: Example 2: Example 3:

(User Chart 2)

(User Chart 1)
123456789012345678901234 (User Chart 2) (User Chart 1)
123456789012345678901234
You can merge.
123456789012345678901234 123456789012345678901234
123456789012345678901234 123456789012345678901234

(Electronic Chart) (Electronic Chart) (Electronic Chart)

How to Display the User Chart:


To display the user chart, see 3.10 “Displaying a User Chart”.
• You can display by selecting [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(1) Select User Chart] in the order.

Manual Update
Objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts) can be manually updated. When you save data after manually updating
the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the issue date of a notice to mariners. Enter the date. You can
check the issue dates of a notice to mariners by using S-57/C-MAP/ARCS information.
Objects that were entered during the course of manual update will be automatically deleted from the chart after a
certain period of time.
A valid period of objects is as follows:

[Valid period of entered objects (example)]

January Entering date Example: January 15 (objects will be displayed after this date)
February (Objects are displayed)
March (Objects are displayed)
April (Deletion of objects) Objects will be deleted on April 1.

5 Chart Editing 5-2


5.1 Chart Edit Mode
There are two modes in this Chart Edit mode: User Chart Edit mode and Manual Update mode. Follow the proce-
dure below to start there modes.

User Chart Edit mode:


Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Chart] - [(2) Chart Editor] in that order. A chart edit screen as shown
below will be displayed. Use this screen to create/edit a user chart.

[Chart Editing Screen] [MENU] Button

Manual Update mode:


Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(6) Manual Updating] in that order.
A chart edit screen similar to the above will be displayed (buttons at the top and the object entering screen on
the left are slightly different). Use this screen to manually update a chart.

Opening Chart Edit menu:


• In User Chart Edit mode or Manual Update mode, left-click on the [MENU] button on the display panel.
The following Chart Edit menu will be displayed at the top of the screen.

5-3 5 Chart Editing


5.2 Menus and Button Functions
5.2.1 Chart Editing Menu
Menu items available in Chart Edit mode are shown below. The same menu items are displayed in User Chart
Edit mode and Manual Update mode, but there will be some special menu items for each mode. There are
some menu items that are the same as the regular menu items. Explanation of these items will be omitted. For
these menu items, see 3. “Basic Operation.”

(1) File
Same button operation:
[New]
[Open] (function for user charts)
Import user charts (function for user charts)
[Save]
[Save as] (when creating a new file) (function for user charts)
Merge user files (function for user charts)
[Close]

(2) Edit
Same button operation:
[Select]
[Add]
[Insert]
[Move]
[Delete]
Undelete the deleted object.
Hide saved objects (by object category) /
Show all hidden objects (function for manual update)
Set to ON when using the EBL/VRM on the operation panel.
[Info]

(3) Cursor

5 Chart Editing 5-4


(4) Chart

(5) View

(6) Alarm

(7) Tool

5-5 5 Chart Editing


5.2.2 Button Functions
In Chart Edit mode, buttons shown below will be displayed at the top of the screen. The same buttons are used
in User Chart Edit mode and Manual Update mode, except for one.

Left-click on this button to close the file and to exit Chart Edit Mode.

During user chart edit:


Left-click on this button to create a new user chart file.

During manual update:


Left-click on this button to manually update the objects.

Left-click on this button to open a created user chart (not available during manual update).

Left-click on this button to save a created user chart.

Left-click when terminating the current editing operation or when selecting an object.

Left-click when adding a segment to the end of the line or a area surrounding line to the
area.

Left-click when inserting a segment into the line.

Left-click when moving an object.

Left-click when deleting an object.

Left-click when opening the information panel of the selected object.

5 Chart Editing 5-6


5.3 Operation Flowchart
This section describes how to edit user charts. For operations in the manual update process, see 5.4 “Manual
Update Operation.”

Files are opened and saved in different ways when you create a new user chart file and when you open a created file.
Open/Save a file following the procedure described in the Table/Graphic Editor section of 4. “Route Planning.”

5.3.1 Flow of User Chart Edit


(1) Creating a new user chart file

Start
5
Start User Chart Edit Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(2) Chart Editor] in that
mode. order.

Left-click on the Open a new user chart file.


[New] button.

Chart edit operation

• Symbols
• Lines
• Areas See 5.5 “Entering Objects” .
• Texts

Left-click on the Enter a file name and a


[Save] button. comment.

Select a datum in the


“Datum Conversion”
panel.

Left-click on the
[Close] button. Exit User Chart Edit mode.

End

5-7 5 Chart Editing


(2) Editing a user chart file

Start

Start User Chart Edit Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(2) Chart Editor] in that
mode. order.

Left-click on the Open user chart file you wish to edit.


[Open] button.

Chart edit operation

• Symbols
• Lines
See 5.5 “Entering Objects”.
• Areas
• Texts

When overwriting When saving under a new file name

Left-click on the Select [Save as] from


[Save] button. the menu.

Select a datum in the


“Datum Conversion”
panel.

Left-click on the
Exit User Chart Edit mode.
[Close] button.

End

5 Chart Editing 5-8


5.3.2 Operation when Editing User Charts
File operations are different when you create a new user chart and when you edit an existing user chart. This section
describes operations in both cases (descriptions follow the “Flow of User Chart Edit” in Section 5.3.1). This
section also describes how to merge user charts and how to import user chart files.
• Creating a new user chart -> See Section 5.3.2.1.
• Editing a user chart -> See Section 5.3.2.2
• Merging user charts -> See Section 5.3.2.3
• Importing user charts -> See Section 5.3.2.4

5.3.2.1 Creating a New User Chart


Follow the procedure below to create a new user chart.

(1) Entering the Chart Editing mode 5


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(2) Chart Editor] in the order.

• When you open the Chart Editing menu, press the [MENU] button on the display panel.
Then, the Chart Editing menu title bar opens. To close it, left-click the [MENU] button again, or left-
click any position on the chart.

[Chart Editing Menu]

(2) Opening a new user chart file


1) Left-click the [New] button.

(3) Entering objects


1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(9) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on (checked). If
you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart, then turn [(9) Use EBL/VRM] off (remove a checkmark)
by selecting [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(9) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.

If using EBL/VRM: Check it.


If not using EBL/VRM: Uncheck it.

2) Proceed to 5.5 “Entering objects” and enter objects.


• After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user chart file.

5-9 5 Chart Editing


(4) Saving a user chart file
1) Left-click the [Save] button.
The “Save as” panel opens.

2) Enter the file name (up to 8 characters) and comment.


3) Left-click the [SAVE] button to close the panel.
Then, the “Datum Conversion” panel opens.
Select one of items by left-clicking it, and select the datum or enter the offset.

• Select Datum:
You can convert the datum of the object from the source datum type to destination datum type.
• Enter Offset:
You can give offset to the object by entering the offset value (latitude/longitude).
4) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
5) Left-click the [Close] button.
Then, the system exit the User Chart Editing mode.

5 Chart Editing 5-10


5.3.2.2 Editing a User Chart
Follow the procedure below to edit an existing user chart.

(1) Starting User Chart mode


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(5) User Charts] - [(2) Chart Editor] in that order.

(2) Opening a user chart file


1) Left-click on the [Open] button.
The “Open Chart File” panel will be displayed.
2) Select the name of a file you wish to open, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user chart file will be displayed.

(3) Entering objects


1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(9) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on (checked). If
you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart, then turn [(9) Use EBL/VRM] off (remove a checkmark)
by selecting [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(9) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.

If using EBL/VRM: Check it.


If not using EBL/VRM: Uncheck it.

2) Proceed to 5.5 “Entering Objects” and enter objects.


• After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user chart file.

5-11 5 Chart Editing


(4) Saving a user chart file
When saving a file without changing its file name (using the [Save] button):
1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
2) Left-click on the [Close] button to exit User Chart Edit mode.

When saving a file under a different name (using the [(5) Save As] menu):
1) Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in that order.
The “Save as” panel will be displayed.

2) Enter a file name (using up to 8 characters) and a comment.


3) Left-click on the [SAVE] button. The panel closes.
The “Datum Conversion” panel opens.
Select [Select Datum] or [Enter Offset] to execute datum conversion or offset entering.

• [Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
• [Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
4) Left-click on the [OK] button. The panel closes.
5) Left-click on the [Close] button
User Chart Edit mode ends.

5 Chart Editing 5-12


5.3.2.3 Merging User Charts
You can merge the user charts as follows:

1) Make a new user chart file or recall a user chart file. (For example, recall User-01 file.)
2) Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(6) Merge] in that order.
The “Open Chart File” panel opens.
3) Left-click the file you want to merge with the User-01 file (for example, User-02), and then left-click the
[OK] button to close the panel.
You will see that both objects of the User-01 and User-02 files are shown on the screen.
4) Left-click the [Save] button to save without changing the file name (User-01).
• If you want to save as the new file, select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(5) Save As] in that order.
5) Left-click the [Close] button.
Then, the system exit the User Chart Editing mode.
5
(User Chart-02)

(User Chart-01)
123456789012345678901234
You can merge.
123456789012345678901234
123456789012345678901234

(Electronic Chart)

5-13 5 Chart Editing


5.3.2.4 Importing User Charts
User chart files can be imported and used.

1) Select [MENU] - [(1) File] - [(3) Import] in that order, and select a file format to be used at the destination.
• CSV file (WGS-84):
Select this when importing user chart data created with the WGS-84 geodetic system.
• CSV file (Japanese geodetic system)
Select this when importing user chart data, created with the Japanese geodetic system, as WGS-84
geodetic system data.
• JRC Chart (JLS700/NWU800):
Select this when importing user chart data created with the JLS700/NWU800.

The “Open” panel will be displayed.

2) Select a file you wish to import, and then left-click on the [OK] button.
The selected user chart will be displayed on the screen.

5 Chart Editing 5-14


5.4 Manual Update Operation
This section describes manual update operations. For operations in the user chart edit process, see 5.3 “Operation
Flowchart” When manually updating the objects, there will be a panel for you to enter the issue date of a notice to
mariners. Enter the date. Entered objects will be automatically deleted from the chart when the valid period is over
(see page 5-2).

5.4.1 Flow of Manual Update

Start

Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(6) Manual Updating] in that order.


Start Manual Update
mode. 5
Left-click on the
[Add] button.

Left-click on a chart [Example]


you wish to edit.

Chart edit operation

• Symbols
• Lines See 5.5 “Entering Objects.”
• Areas
• Texts

Left-click on the
[Save] button

Select a datum in the


“Datum Conversion”
panel.

Enter the issue date of


a notice to mariners.

Left-click on the
[Close] button. Exit Manual Update mode.

End

5-15 5 Chart Editing


5.4.2 Operation when Manually Updating Objects
This section describes operations in the manual update procedure (descriptions follow 5.4.1 “Flow of Manual
Update”).

(1) Starting Manual Update mode


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(6) Manual Updating] in that order.
• Left-click on the [MENU] button on the display panel to open the Chart Edit menu. The Chart Edit
menu will be displayed at the top of the screen. Left-click on the [MENU] button again or left-click
anywhere on the chart to close the menu window.

[Chart Edit menu]

(2) Selecting a chart to be edited


1) Left-click on the [Add] button.
The “Select Chart” panel will be displayed. Left-click on the [OK] button so that the panel closes.

2) Left-click on the chart you wish to edit.


A panel showing the chart name will be displayed. Left-click on the [OK] button so that the panel closes
(as shown on the right).

(3) Entering Objects


1) When you use EBL/VRM to enter objects, make sure that [(9) Use EBL/VRM] is turned on (checked). If
you do not use EBL/VRM when editing a chart, then turn [(9) Use EBL/VRM] off (remove a checkmark)
by selecting [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(9) Use EBL/VRM] in that order.

If using EBL/VRM: Check it.


If not using EBL/VRM: Uncheck it.

2) Proceed to 5.5 “Entering Objects” and enter objects.


After obtaining objects, follow the procedure described in (4) below to save a user chart file.

5 Chart Editing 5-16


(4) Saving a user chart file
1) Left-click on the [Save] button.
The “Datum Conversion” panel opens.
Select [Select Datum] or [Enter Offset] to execute datum conversion or offset entering.

5
• [Select Datum]:
You can convert an object datum from [Source Datum] to [Destination Datum].
• [Enter Offset]:
You can specify offset (latitude/longitude) of the object and move the object.
2) Left-click on the [OK] button. The panel closes.
The “Notice to Mariners” panel opens.
Enter “the issue date of a notice to mariners.”

3) Left-click on the [OK] button. The panel closes.


4) Left-click on the [Close] button
Manual Update mode ends.

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Tips! (How to check dates of issue of a notice to mariners for entered objects)
• You can use the Object “Information” panel to check the dates of issue of a notice to mariners for entered objects.
Use the [INFO] button on the operation panel, or select [(1) Cursor] - [(9) S-57/C-MAP/ARCS Information] /
[(1) Other Information] so that object information will be retrieved. Entered dates of the objects will be dis-
played.

Display example

5-17 5 Chart Editing


5.5 Entering Objects
This section describes how to enter objects. Basic operations are the same in User Chart Edit and Manual Update
modes. There are four types of objects (symbols, lines, areas, and texts). User Chart Edit mode and Manual Update
mode use different symbols and lines.

● Object types available for user chart edit


[Symbol Tab] [Line Tab] [Area Tab] [Text Tab]

5 Chart Editing 5-18


● Object types available for manual update
[Symbol Tab] [Line Tab] [Area Tab] [Text Tab]

5-19 5 Chart Editing


5.5.1 Selecting Object Types
1) Left-click on a tab for the object type (symbol, line, area, and text) you wish to select.
2) Select the object you want. See “How to Select Objects” below.
The selected object may be displayed at the bottom part of the object selection panel.
3) Left-click the [Add] button at the bottom part of this panel. Then, the cursor changes as follows:

: Object entry cursor

Now you can enter the object you have selected.

How to Select Objects:


You can see the tree structure of the objects on the object
selection panel. For example, to select “Light flare, default” 1)
symbol of the barrel buoy, perform as follows. 2)
1) Left-click “Buoys” twice quickly to open the items be- 3)
hind it.
2) Left-click “Barrel buoy” twice quickly to open the items
behind it. (Keep continue this operation until “-” mark
disappears.)
3) Left-click “Light flare, default”.
The symbol will appear at the bottom of this panel.
• To close “Buoys”, left-click it twice quickly.

You can also select the item by left-clicking “+” and “-”
mark:
• Left-clicking “+” will open the behind items.
• Left-clicking “-” will close the behind items.

Before entering the object, always left-click


this button.

5 Chart Editing 5-20


5.5.2 Entering Objects
See the current cursor position displayed at the bottom when enetering objects.

(1) How to enter symbols


Putting symbols:
1) Select one of the objects on the symbol selection panel and left-click the [Add] button at the bottom of the
symbol selection panel.
• Be sure that the cursor type is on the chart.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to put the symbol.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the symbol is added on the chart.
3) To terminate entry, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor changes
SEL

to . (To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu.)
5
First entry Second entry

Last entry

Deleting symbols [Delete]:


SEL

1) Left-click the symbol you want to delete with the cursor .


2) Left-click the [Delete] button. (If you want to undelete, select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(6) Undelete].)

Selected symbol

Moving symbols [Move]:


SEL

1) Left-click the symbol you want to move with the cursor .


2) Left-click the [Move] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want. Then, the symbol is moved to the new position.
4) To terminate the operation, left-click the [Select] button or any position on the chart.

(When you left-click the cursor.)

5-21 5 Chart Editing


Getting Information and Editing Information (Symbol):
1) Left-click the symbol you want to get information.
2) Left-click the [Info] button.
The “Location/Attributes” panel opens.
• You can edit the latitude and longitude by left-clicking the [Edit] button.
• You can rotate the symbol by entering rotational angle to “Rotation”.
• You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
• You can enter a comment.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

Rotated symbol by 90 degrees

Difference in symbol display between User Chart Edit mode and Manual Update mode:
Symbols used in the manual update operation will have a mark as shown below. Symbols used in the user chart
edit operation will not have this mark.

[Symbols used in the user chart edit operation] [Symbols used in the manual update operation]

This mark will be added.

5 Chart Editing 5-22


○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Tips!
• During editing, you can see what kind of operation is currently possible from the active button.
For example, when you left-click a symbol, the following buttons will be active.
[Move], [Delete], [Select] and [Info]
This means that you can move, delete, or deselect the selected symbol. Also, you can see the information on the
selected symbol with the [Info] button.

• Hiding objects (only during the manual update operation)


Saved objects can be hidden from the chart. For details, see 5.5.3 “Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual
Update Operation).”

5
Using EBL/VRM on the operation panel:
You can use the EBL/VRM keys and dials on the operation panel when positioning an object or drawing a line.
When using EBL/VRM, see 4.1.3.8 “Creating a Route Using EBL/VRM Keys and Dials.”
• When using EBL/VRM, first make sure that [(9) Use EBL/VRM] is checked.

If using EBL/VRM: Check it.

5-23 5 Chart Editing


(2) How to draw lines
Drawing lines:
1) Select one of the objects on the line selection panel and left-click the [Add] button at the bottom of the line
selection panel.
• Be sure that the cursor type is on the chart.
2) Rotate the trackball to move the cursor, and left-click at the position you want to start drawing a line.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line is extended on the chart.
3) To terminate entry, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor changes
SEL

to . (To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu.)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Tips! (Moving the chart)
• Click the left mouse button while drawing lines. A hand icon will be shown on the chart. Move the mouse while
holding the left button down to move the chart.

Deleting the line [Delete]:


1) Slowly double left-click the segment of the line you want to delete so that the whole segments of the line
are selected. (Even if the line has a single segment, you need to double left-click it.)
2) Left-click the [Delete] button. (If you want to undelete, select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(6) Undelete].)

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Tips! (Selecting a segment)
• When it is difficult to properly click on the segment you wish to delete, press the Chart [Zoom In] button
provided on the right side of the display panel. This will allow you to click on the target segment easily.

5 Chart Editing 5-24


Inserting the segment [Insert]:
1) Left-click the segment you want to insert an additional segment.
2) Left-click the [Insert] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to insert the segment.
4) To terminate insertion, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor changes
SEL

to . (To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu.)

(When you left-click the cursor.)

5
Adding the segment (to the end of the line) [Add]:
1) Left-click the last segment of the line.
2) Left-click the [Add] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to add the segment.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the new segment is added.
4) To terminate addition, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor changes
SEL

to . (To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu.)

Moving the line [Move]


1) Slowly double left-click the segment of the line you want to move so that the whole segments of the line
are selected. (Even if the line has a single segment, you need to double left-click it.)
2) Left-click the [Move] button, and rotate the trackball to move the cursor.
3) Left-click the cursor at the position you want to move the line.

(When you left-click the cursor.)

5-25 5 Chart Editing


Getting Information and Editing Information (Line)
1) Left-click the line you want to get information.
2) Left-click the [Info] button.
The “Location/Attributes” panel opens.
• You can edit the latitude and longitude of each segment using the [Edit] button.
• You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
• You can change the line’s attributes, line color (7 colors), line width (5 widths)
and line style (3 styles).
• You can enter a comment.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

5 Chart Editing 5-26


(3) How to draw areas -- Area (Polygon)/Warning Area
How to draw the Area (Polygon) and Waring Area is the same and the drawing method is similar to that for
line. So, for detailed operation, refer to “Drawing Lines” mentioned earlier.

Drawing Area (Polygon)/Warning Area:


1) Select Polygon or Waring Area on the area selection panel and left-click the [Add] button at the bottom of
the selection panel.
• Be sure that the cursor type is on the chart.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to draw the area.
Each time you left-click the cursor, the line (side) is extended on the chart.
3) To terminate entry, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. (To abort, right-click the
SEL

trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu.) Area is created and the cursor changes to .
(Draw sides.) (Left-click [Select].) 5

How to get information and edit area:


1) Left-click the inside of the area to select it.
2) Left-click the [Info] button to open the “Location/Attributes” panel.
• You can edit the latitude and longitude of each side of the area using the [Edit] button.
• You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
• You can change the attributes, line color (7 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3 styles).
• You can change the color to be filled in the area (7 colors) and the transparency of the color (0%, 25%,
50%, 75%).
• You can enter a comment.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the location/attributes set with the panel apply to the selected area.

(Same color but transparency


differs.)

5-27 5 Chart Editing


How to Move the Area:
1) Left-click the inside of the area to select it.
2) Left-click the [Move] button, move the cursor to the position you want to move, and left-click the cursor.
Then, the area moves at the designated point.

(Left-click [Move].) (Left-click the cursor.)

How to Delete the Area:


1) Left-click the inside of the area to select it.
2) Left-click the [Delete] button to delete the area.
• If you want to undelete, select [MENU] - [(2) Edit] - [(6) Undelete].

This will be deleted.

How to add a side to the area:


1) Left-click the side of the area you want add a side.
2) Left-click the [Insert] button, move the cursor to the position you want, and left-click the cursor.
Then, new side is added to the area.

(Left-click the side.) (Left-click [Insert].) (Left-click the cursor.)

5 Chart Editing 5-28


(4) How to draw areas -- Circle and Ellipse
1) Select Circle or Ellipse on the area selection panel and left-click the [Add] button at the bottom of the area
selection panel.
• Be sure that the cursor type is on the chart.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the circle/ellipse.
3) To draw a circle, move the cursor to determine the radius of the circle and left-click the cursor.
To draw a ellipse, move the cursor and left-click the cursor.
4) To terminate drawing, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor changes
SEL

to . (To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu.)
5) To change the location/attributes of the circle or ellipse, left-click the object, and then the [Info] button.
Then, the “Location/Attributes” panel opens.

(Left-click the cursor.) (Left-click the cursor.)

(Color can be changed using the [Info] button.)


(Same color but trans-
parency differs.)

0%

50%

[“Location/Attributes” panel for Circle/Ellipse]


• You can edit the latitude and longitude of each object using the [Edit] button.
• You can edit the radius/axis of the ellipse. (Not for the circle but for the ellipse only)
• You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
• You can change the attributes, line color (7 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3 styles).
• You can change the color to be filled in the area (7 colors) and the transparency of the color (0%, 25%,
50%, 75%).
• You can enter a comment.
6) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.

5-29 5 Chart Editing


(5) How to draw areas -- Fans
1) Select Fans on the area selection panel and left-click the [Add] button at the bottom of the area selection
panel.
• Be sure that the cursor type is on the chart.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the center position of the fan.
3) Move the cursor to determine the radius and beginning angle of the fan and left-click the cursor.
4) Move the cursor to determine the ending angle and left-click the cursor.
5) To terminate drawing, left-click the [Select] button or perform abortion operation. Then, the cursor changes
SEL

to . (To abort, right-click the trackball and select [Abort] from the pop-up menu.)
6) To change the location/attributes of the fan, left-click the fan, and then the [Info] button.

• Case 1 • Case 2

[“Location/Attributes” panel for Fan]


• You can edit the latitude and longitude of each object using the [Edit] button.
• You can edit the radius/axis and angle of the fan.
• You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
• You can change the attributes, line color (7 colors), line width (5 widths) and line style (3 styles).
• You can change the color to be filled in the area (7 colors) and the transparency of the color (0%, 25%,
50%, 75%).
• You can enter a comment.
7) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the object changes according to the location/attribute settings.

5 Chart Editing 5-30


(6) How to enter text (small/large font)
1) Select Small font or Large font on the text selection panel and left-click the [Add] button at the bottom of
the text selection panel.
• Be sure that the cursor type is on the chart.
2) Move the cursor and left-click at the position you want to enter the text.
The word “Text” is displayed at the left-clicked position.
At the same time, the “Location/Attributes” panel opens. You can specify the location and select attributes
by using this panel.

(When you select Small Font) (When you select Large Font)

[“Location/Attributes” panel for text]


• You can edit the latitude and longitude of each object using the [Edit] button.
• You can edit the rotational angle of the text.
• You can set Min Scale and Max Scale that limit the display of this object.
• You can change the color (7 colors) and font size (6 to 72 points).
• You can enter the text that will be displayed on the chart and comment.

3) Left-click on the [OK] button to close the panel.


The settings made in the “Location/Attributes” panel will be applied.
Repeat above steps to enter text at desired locations.
4) To terminate the text-entering operation, left-click on the [Select] button or execute cancel operation. The
SEL

cursor type changes to (to cancel: right-click the trackball and then select [Abort] from the pop-up
menu).

5-31 5 Chart Editing


5) Editing entered text
Left-click on the lower left part of the text you wish to edit (“Text,” for example).

Then, left-click on the [Info] button. The


“Location/Attributes” panel opens. By re-
ferring to step 2) above, edit the position
and attributes of the selected text. Left-click
on the [OK] button when you finish edit-
ing. The panel closes. The new settings
will be applied to the selected text.

5.5.3 Hiding Objects (Only during the Manual Update Operation)


Objects that have been saved in Manual Update mode cannot be edited, but it is possible to hide them from the
chart. This function is available only in Manual Update mode.

(1) Hiding objects


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(6) Manual Updating] in that order and start Manual Update mode (if you
are editing objects in Manual Update mode, first exit the mode and then restart it).
2) Select an object you wish to hide by left-clicking on it.
3) Select [Menu] - [(2) Edit] - [(7) Hide Object] in that order.
The selected object disappears from the chart.
4) Repeat the same procedure to hide objects one by one.

(2) Restoring hidden objects


1) Select [MENU] - [(2) Chart] - [(6) Manual Updating] in that order and start Manual Update mode (if you
are editing objects in Manual Update mode, first exit the mode and then restart it).
2) Select [Menu] - [(2) Edit] - [(8) Reset Hide] in that order.
The hide command will be canceled, and all the hidden objects will be displayed again.

Note: You can no longer hide/unhide objects after you select a chart to be edited by pressing the [Add]
button in Manual Update mode.

5 Chart Editing 5-32


6
Automatic
Sailing
Caution: Before starting automatic sailing, be sure to check the safety of the route and crossing safety
contour.

The system calculate the set course (course to steer) from the relationship between the scheduled route and the
ship’s position. Automatic sailing along the scheduled route is carried by outputting the course to the autopilot.
The three kinds of automatic sailing methods can be used.
• ANTS Auto
• ANTS Manual
• Normal

About ANTS (Automatic Navigation Track-keeping System):


ANTS in conjunction with the sources of position, heading and speed information is intended to keep a ship auto-
matically on a scheduled route over ground under various conditions within the limits related to the ship’s maneu-
verability.

6.1 Automatic Sailing System


6.1.1 Explanation of Automatic Sailing System
There are three operations in automatic sailing.
1) Entering the scheduled route (maneuvering) (ANTS Auto only)
You can automatically enter the scheduled route. The system automatically calculate predicted route based on
your ship’s condition (position, course, etc.). If satisfactory result is obtained, maneuvering is automatically
made to enter the scheduled route.

θ: Angle to enter the scheduled route


Reach: Distance between when the wheel is steered
R and when the ship begins to turn
R: Turning radius
Reach (nm)

XTEn R

Reach (nm)

Approach (nm)

6 Automatic Sailing 6-2


2) Maintaining the course
Calculates the course for maintaining the planned route.

3) Change of course (turning)


Turning operation differs depending on the automatic sailing methods (ANTS Auto, ANTS Manual and Normal)
as follows:

ANTS Auto: When the ship arrived at the wheel over line (WOL) after reaching the reach line, turning auto-
matically starts at a constant radius.

WP3

Next Leg
Turning stops when the difference
between the heading and the next
6
WP2 leg becomes within ±3 degrees.

WOL

Reach line

WOP
Radius (nm)

Course change alarm


Reach
(ACC alarm: 30 seconds before arriving at the reach line)

(ECC alarm: 5 minutes before arriving at the reach line)

Cross track distance (XTD)

Reach: Distance between when the wheel is steered and when the ship begins to turn
Radius: Turning radius
WOP: Wheel over point
WOL: Wheel over line (Steering point)

[ANTS Auto Turing Operation]

6-3 6 Automatic Sailing


ANTS Manual: When the ship arrived at the reach line, you need to press the turn key ([GUARD] + [TURN])
for turning the ship.

WP3

Next Leg
Turning stops when the difference
between the heading and the next
WP2 leg becomes within ±3 degrees.

WOL

Reach line

WOP
Radius (nm)

After arriving at the reach line, turn key ([GUARD] + [TURN])


Reach
is acceptable.
(ACC alarm: 30 seconds before arriving at the reach line)

(ECC alarm: 5 minutes before arriving at the reach line)

Cross track distance (XTD)

Reach: Distance between when the wheel is steered and when the ship begins to turn
Radius: Turning radius
WOP: Wheel over point
WOL: Wheel over line (Steering point)

[ANTS Manual Turing Operation]

6 Automatic Sailing 6-4


Normal: When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WP, you need to press the turn key ([GUARD] +
[TURN]) for turning the ship.

WP3

Next Leg

WP2
Boundary of WP

Arrival alarm

Cross track distance (XTD)

[Normal Turing Operation]

6-5 6 Automatic Sailing


6.1.2 Route Monitoring and System Alarm

Warning/Alarm Condition of warning/alarm occurrence No acknowledge


OffCo The difference between heading and route Warning continues
(Off Course) course exceeds the limit.
XTE The difference from the route exceeds the limit. Continue automatic sailing
(Cross Track Error)
ARR (Arrival) The ship exceeds the boundary of the next way- Not turning
point.
GYRO Gyrocompass is in failure. Warning continues. Stop automatic sail-
ing. (Autopilot keeps last rudder angle.
See autopilot manual for further infor-
mation.)
POS1 The system position 1 has some errors. Warning continues. Stop automatic sail-
JUMP (Position Shift) The primary position shifts beyond the limit. ing. See 6.3.1-(5) “Emergency operation”
and 6.3.2-(5) “Avoiding the danger”.
Route The ship exceeds the boundary of the last way-
(Autopilot keeps last rudder angle. See
point.
autopilot manual for further informa-
tion.)

6 Automatic Sailing 6-6


6.2 Selecting the Automatic Sailing Type
Select the automatic sailing type at first, and then proceed to 6.3 “Automatic Sailing Operation”.

1) Select [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(0) Option] in that order.


Then, the “Autosail Option” panel opens.
2) Select items and enter values as required. Then, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

6
a) Tracking Gain
• Low: Route keeping is loose.
• Mid: Route keeping is tight-loose.
• High: Route keeping is tight.
b) Drift Correction
When the autopilot made by YOKOGAWA is used, this item should be set to OFF state.
c) Dead Band
d) Autosail
• ANTS Auto
• ANTS Manual
• Normal
e) Turn Mode
• Constant Radius: ANTS Manual
• Actual Radiuss: ANTS Auto
• Tangential Lines: ANTS Manual, Normal

During automatic sailing, only “Tracking Gain”, “Drift Correction” and “Dead Band” are accessible.

6-7 6 Automatic Sailing


6.3 Automatic Sailing Operation
Start the automatic sailing of ANTS Auto, ANTS Manual, or Normal type. Since the operation procedure for ANTS
Manual and Normal is the same, they are explained together.

The general procedure for automatic sailing is as follows:


1) Select the route type and WP, and start the automatic sailing. (This step is explained here.)
2) Set the steering mode of the autopilot to “NAVI” for the autopilot made by YOKOGAWA.
(Set it to “RC” mode for the autopilot made by TOKIMEC.)
3) Route monitoring
4) After ending voyage, switch the steering mode of the autopilot from the “NAVI” to “HAND” mode.
5) Unload the route to clear it from the screen.

Note: For operation of the autopilot, see its instruction manual .

6.3.1 Automatic Sailing Using ANTS Auto

(1) Selecting the route of ANTS type and the WP


To select the route, use the “ROUTE” on the display panel or the menu ([MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(1) Select
Route]). For details, see 3.4 “Selecting ROUTE and To WP”.
1) Select the ANTS type route. (The route file name of ANTS type has the extension “.rta”.)

(2) Selecting ANTS Auto


Select ANTS Auto on the “Autosail Option” panel after selecting [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(0) Option] in
that order.
For details, see 6.2 “Selecting the Automatic Sailing Type”.

(3) Start automatic sailing


1) Select [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(1) Start] in that order.
Then, the “Select WP” panel opens.

• Select the WP to which the ship goes.


• Enter the approach speed.

2) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.


Then, the following dialog box opens.

6 Automatic Sailing 6-8


[Question for predicted route calculation]

3) Left-click the [OK] button to continue automatic sailing procedure.


If the calculated result is not successful, one of the following error dialog boxes will be displayed.
In this case, maneuvering to enter the scheduled route cannot be correctly made. So, you need to change
the position, course, etc. of your ship referring to the instruction of the error message.

Course Error:
Occurs when the difference in bearing between
the scheduled route and the heading of the ship is
6
more than 90 degrees.

XTE Error:
Occurs when the ship is apart exceeding the XTD
value being set.

Route Error:
Occurs when the predicted route directly intersects
with the next leg.

Overrun Error:
Occurs when the scheduled route is too near and
the approach run exceeds the scheduled route.

6-9 6 Automatic Sailing


If no error message is displayed, then the confirmation dialog box will appear.

4) Left-click the [OK] button.


Then, the automatic sailing (ANTS Auto) starts and route monitoring is carried out by the system.

Cautions:
• During automatic sailing, check own ship position and bearing as usual.
• During automatic sailing, do not change the route unless you need avoiding.

(4) Terminating the automatic sailing


1) Select [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(2) Stop] in that order.
Then, the confirmation dialog box will appear.

2) Left-click the [OK] button to stop the automatic sailing.

(5) Emergency operation


Change the steering mode of the autopilot from “NAVI” to “HAND”, or carry out override operation for
avoiding danger.

6.3.2 Automatic Sailing Using ANTS Manual/Normal

(1) Selecting the route and the WP


To select the route, use the “ROUTE” on the display panel or the menu ([MENU] - [(5) Route] - [(1) Select
Route]). For details, see 3.4 “Selecting ROUTE and To WP”.
When you use ANTS Manual:
1) Select the ANTS type route. (The route file name of ANTS type has the extension “.rta”.)
When you use Normal:
1) Select the Normal type route. (The route file name of Normal type has the extension “.rtn”.)

(2) Selecting ANTS Manual/Normal


Select ANTS Manual/Normal on the “Autosail Option” panel after selecting [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(0)
Option] in that order.
For details, see 6.2 “Selecting the Automatic Sailing Type”.

6 Automatic Sailing 6-10


(3) Start automatic sailing
1) Select [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(1) Start] in that order.
Then, the “Select WP” panel opens.
[For ANTS Manual (.rta)] [For Normal (.rtn)]

• Select the WP to which the ship goes.


• Select either “Direct route to Waypoint” or “Along the Leg” by left-clicking it.
Direct route to Waypoint: Your will directly go to the designated WP.
Along the Leg: Your will go along the leg.
6
2) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the confirmation dialog box will appear.

3) Left-click the [OK] button to continue automatic sailing procedure.


Then, the automatic sailing (ANTS Manual/Normal) starts and route monitoring is carried out by the
system.

During automatic sailing, you should turn the ship with the turn key
([GUARD] + [TURN]) as follows:
GUARD + TURN

ANTS Manual:
When the ship arrived at the reach line, ACC (arrived at actual course change point) alarm is issued.
After this alarm, press the [TURN] key on the operation panel while pressing and holding down the [GUARD]
key.
Then, the ship will turn at a constant radius when the ship arrives at the WOL (steering point). At the WOL,
ARR (arrived at WOL) alarm will be issued.

Normal:
When the ship arrived at the boundary of the WP, ARR (arrived at WP) alarm is issued. Press the [TURN] key
on the operation panel while pressing and holding down the [GUARD] key.
Then, the ship will start to turn.

6-11 6 Automatic Sailing


(4) Terminating the automatic sailing
1) Select [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(2) Stop] in that order.
Then, the confirmation dialog box will appear.

2) Left-click the [OK] button to stop the automatic sailing.

(5) Avoiding the danger


During automatic sailing, you can perform the following avoiding operation for avoiding danger.
1) Select [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(3) Start Avoiding] in that order.
Then, “Avoid” panel opens.

Select one of options by left-clicking it.


• Enter Course: Select when avoiding by changing the course. Enter the value for course.
• To Waypoint No.: Select when avoiding by specifying the WP number. Left-click the WP number.

2) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.


Automatic avoiding will take place.
When you use “Enter Course”, stop avoiding operation after avoiding the danger. Then, specify the WP
number you want to return to by proceeding to the next step 3).
3) Select [MENU] - [(6) Auto Sail] - [(4) Stop Avoiding] in that order.
Then, the “Stop Avoiding” panel opens. You can determine to where you return.

Select one of options by left-clicking it.


• Go to the To Waypoint (Direct): Select when you return to the current WP directly.
• Go to the To Waypoint (Leg): Select when you return to the current WP’s leg.
• Go to the Next Waypoint (Direct): Select when you return to the next WP directly.
• Go to the Next Waypoint (Leg): Select when you return to the next WP’s leg.
4) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

6 Automatic Sailing 6-12


7
Tool Menu/
Maintenance Menu
The tool menu consists of the following submenus.
• Keyboard:
Software keyboard will appear on the screen. (Currently not available)
• File Manager:
The file manager performs file copying operations. For example, you can save the data such as the route file you
have created in the FD. Also, you can copy the FD’s files to the system’s hard disk.
• Chart Portfolio
Charts are imported/updated/deleted.
For chart portfolio operations, see 8. “Chart Portfolio.”
• Navigation Graph
A navigation graph will be displayed. See the separate operation manual for details.

The maintenance menu consists of the following submenus.


• Connectivity
Connectivity between the ECDIS and external sensors will be checked.
• Color Pattern
A color test pattern will be displayed to check the colors displayed on the ECDIS.
• Grayscale
A color test pattern will be displayed to check the colors displayed on the ECDIS.
• For Engineers
This submenu is to be used only by our service personnel. It is usually unavailable.

7.1 File Manager


(1) How to determine the copy path
You can copy the file from hard disk to FD and vise versa. Note that the “copy from” side is on the left side of
the screen and the “copy to” side is on the right side.

Example:
1) In the box “a)”, left-click the drop-down list button and select the system’s hard disk by left-clicking it. (If
you want to copy from the FD, you should select FD drive instead of hard disk.)
• You can also select the hard disk of the Navigation Workstation.
2) In the box “b)”, left-click the folder where the ECDIS data files are stored.
The stored ECDIS data files will be displayed in the box “c)”.
3) In the box “d)”, left-click the drop-down list button and select the FD drive. (The same operation as “Copy
from” applies to “Coyp to” boxes d), e) and f).)
• You can also select the FD drive of the Navigation Workstation.
4) In the box “e)”, left-click the folder you want to copy to, if any.

7 Tool Menu/Maintenance Menu 7-2


a) d)
b)
e)

c)
f)

(Copy from box) (Copy to box)

(2) Copying the file


1) Load an FD into the FD drive.
2) Select [Menu] - [(8) Tool] - [(2) File Manager] in that order.
7
Then, the “File Manager” panel opens.
3) Select the copy path referring to (1) “How to determine the copy path”.
4) Left-click the drop-down list button on the bottom left of the screen and select one of the data types by
left-clicking it.
Then, the selected data file will be displayed in the “Copy from” and “Copy to” boxes. For example, if you
select “Route File (Normal)”, the files with the extension “.rtn” will be displayed.

Copied

(Copy from box) (Copy to box)

7-3 7 Tool Menu/Maintenance Menu


5) Left-click the [Copy] button to start copying.
The selected file is copied to the FD.
6) Left-click the [Close] button to close the panel.

Deleting operation:
You can delete the files in the “Copy to” box.
1) Select one of files by left-clicking it, or select all files by left-clicking the [Select All] button.
2) Left-click the [Delete] button. Then, the confirmation dialog box opens.
Left-click the [OK] button to execute deletion.

Data type drop-down list:

Route File (Normal): Route files of normal type with the extension “.rtn” made in 4 “Route Planning”.
Route File (ANTS): Route files of ANTS type with the extension “.rta” made in 4 “Route Planning”.
User Chart: User chart files with the extension “.uch” made in 5 “Chart Editing”.
Manual Update: Manual update files with the extension “.mup” made in 5 “Chart Editing”.
Deck Logbook: Logbook files with the extension “.Lgb” obtained during voyage.
Past Track (Own Ship): Past track files of own ship. The file’s extension is “.own”.
Past Track (Other Ship): Past track files of other ships. The file’s extension is “.tgt”.

7 Tool Menu/Maintenance Menu 7-4


7.2 Connection
Communications between the ECDIS and external devices connected to the ECDIS can be checked.
1) Select [MENU] - [(9) Maintenance] - [(1) Connection] in that order.
The “DEVICE DATA DUMP” panel will be displayed.
2) From the Device Selection field, select a device connected to the ECDIS.
3) Left-click on the [Start] button. Information entered from the selected external device will be displayed in
the entry data display box in real time. Also, information outputted to the selected external device will be
displayed in the output data display box in real time. Left-click on the [Stop] button to stop information
from being updated. Left-click on the [Clear] button to clear the currently displayed information. If there
is no inputting/outputting of data between the ECDIS and the selected external device, then nothing will
be displayed in the data display box.

7-5 7 Tool Menu/Maintenance Menu


7.3 Color Pattern (S-57 Only)
The color test pattern for the S-57 charts will be displayed.
1) Select [MENU] - [(9) Maintenance] - [(2) Color Test] in that order.
The ECDIS is exited and the color pattern becomes activated.

2) Right-click to see the pop-up menu.

Day Bright: A “day-time” color pattern will be displayed.


Day Whiteback: A “relatively bright” color pattern will be displayed.
Day Blackback: A color pattern against a “black background” will be displayed.
Dusk: A “relatively dark” color pattern will be displayed.
Night: A “night-time” color pattern will be displayed.
Exit: Exit the color pattern display and return to the ECDIS.

3) Left-click on Exist from the pop-up menu to exit the color pattern.

7 Tool Menu/Maintenance Menu 7-6


7.4 Color Pattern (ARCS)
The color test pattern for the ARCS charts will be displayed.
1) Select [MENU] - [(9) Maintenance] - [(2) Color Test] in that order.
The “ColorDialog” panel opens and a color pattern for ARCS will be displayed.

2) Left-click on the [Close] button to close the color pattern.

7-7 7 Tool Menu/Maintenance Menu


7.5 Gray Scale
The grays cale pattern for a color test will be displayed.
1) Select [MENU] - [(9) Maintenance] - [(3) Gray Scale] in that order.
The ECDIS is exited and the gray scale pattern becomes activated.

2) Left-click anywhere on the gray scale to exit the gray scale pattern. The ECDIS will start up.

7 Tool Menu/Maintenance Menu 7-8


8
Chart
Portfolio
How to import/update the charts (S-57, S-57 Primar, C-MAP and ARCS) is described here.
To update the charts, you will need the CD-ROM. Also, you will need a chart permit file (ARCS chart permit FD)
for updating ARCS chart.
Before importing/updating the charts, you will be requested to enter authorization code or permit code.
After importing/updating, you can display the updated chart on the ECDIS main screen for voyage.

8.1 Entering/Exiting the Chart Portfolio Mode

(1) Entering the Chart Portfolio mode (Startup Menu)


1) Turn ON the power by pressing the [PWR] key on the operation panel.
The Startup menu will then be displayed.

Navigation
E Planning

C Chart Portforio

P Playback

[Startup Menu]
2) Move the cursor with the trackball and left-click the “Chart Portfolio” in the startup menu.
Then, the Chart Portfolio main screen will be displayed.

Note: If nothing is selected in the startup menu for 10 seconds, the system automatically enters the “ECDIS
Main” and the ECDIS main screen is display.

(2) Entering Chart Portfolio mode (ECDIS menu)


1) Select [MENU] - [(8) Tool] - [(3) Chart Portfolio] - [(1) Create] in that order using the ECDIS menu. The
Chart Portfolio main screen will be displayed.

8 Chart Portfolio 8-2


[Chart Portfolio Main Screen]
Menus Buttons [Exit] Button

(Progress meter will appear during


importing/updating process.)

(Log data will appear during


importing/updating process.)
(Source Chat Table)/(System Chart Table)

(3) Exiting the Chart Portfolio mode


8
1) Left-click the [Exit] button on the Chart Portfolio main screen.
Then, the following confirmation dialog box opens. Left-click the [OK] button to exit the Chart Portfolio mode.

8.2 Chart Portfolio Main Screen


The Chart Portfolio main screen shown on the previous page consists of the following parts:
• Menus
• Buttons (All button function can be accessible from the menu)
• Chart table display area

(1) Menus
Chart:

8-3 8 Chart Portfolio


• [ARCS] - [Import/Regist Chart Permit]:
Opens “Import/Enter Chart Permit” panel for importing and registering the Chart Permit. (This is an
administration tool.)
• [ARCS] - [Backup Chart Permit]:
Used to back up the Chart Permit operation. The opened panel will ask you insertion of the ARCS chart
permit FD.
• [C-MAP] - [Regist/Confirm User/Authorization Code]:
Opens the “C-MAP Authorization Wizard” for authorization.
• [Primar]: (Primar is not currently available)
• Connect Primar Site: Used to connect to the site for getting the product list.
• Disconnect: Used to disconnect the line.
• Get Product List: Used to display the dialog box for getting the product list.
• Download: Used to download the specified cell in the product list.
• [Import/Update]:
Starts importing/updating the charts read from the CD-ROM.
• [Abort]: Aborts the importing/updating processing.
• [Exit]: Exits the Chart Portfolio mode.

Sort:

Selectable chart types

• [Retry Auto-Detect]:
Left-clicking this menu will re-read the charts of the selected type from the CD-ROM.
• Chart types ([S-57], [S-57 Primar (Offline)], [C-MAP], or [ARCS]):
The charts of the selected type will be displayed in the source/system chart table in the Chart Portfolio
main screen.

Edit:

• [Selectable Filter]:
Turns ON/OFF the filtering function.
• [Select All]:
Selects the all cells/zones in the source chart table on the Chart Portfolio main screen.
• [Delete]:
Delete the selected cell in the system chart table on the Chart Portfolio main screen.
• [Enter Cell Permit (S-57 Primar)]: (Primar is not currently available)
The password entry panel opens. If the password is accepted, then the Cell Permit entry panel opens.

8 Chart Portfolio 8-4


View:

• [Chart Information]:
Shows the detailed cell information of the chart being selected in the source or system chart table on the
Chart Portfolio main screen. (For S-57/C-MAP)
• [Cell Permit Information (S-57 Primar)]:
Shows the Cell Permit Information for the chart being selected in the source or system chart table on the
Chart Portfolio main screen.
• [ARCS License Information]:
Checks the validity of the ARCS license information and shows the check result.
• [Log]:
Displays the log on the right side of the screen during importing/updating process. Other log may be
displayed.

Tool:

8
Caution: This is an administration tool. Do not use this menu.

• [Selectable Filter]:
Filters the source charts to be displayed in the source chart table on the Chart Portfolio main screen in
various ways.
• [Option]:
Used to set options for S-57, S-57 Primar, C-MAP, ARCS, Boot and Advanced panels.
• [Technical Tool]:
An administration tool.

Version:

• [Chart Portfolio Version Information]:


Opens the version dialog box.

8-5 8 Chart Portfolio


(2) Button functions

Left-clicking this menu will re-read the charts of the selected type from the CD-ROM.

Used for S-57 Primar in online mode. (Currently not available)

Used for downloading the source chart data.

Starts importing/updating the charts.

Aborts the importing/updating processing.

Shows the detailed information of the chart being selected in the source or system chart
table on the Chart Portfolio main screen.

Displays the log on the right side of the screen during importing/updating process.

Exits the Chart Portfolio mode.

8 Chart Portfolio 8-6


(3) Table view
Initially, chart table is displayed on the Chart Portfolio main screen, and the source charts read from the CD-
ROM are displayed in the source chart table. (If no CD-ROM is in the CD drive, no chart will be displayed in
the source chart table. In this case, insert a CD-ROM and left-click the [Auto Detect] button.)
The Chart Portfolio main screen has two tables, the source chart table and system chart table. Each table can
be selected by left-clicking the respective tabs.

Source Chart table: Display the charts read from the CD-ROM.
System Chart table: Displays the stored charts in the system. When the source charts are imported/updated,
they are stored in the system and appear in the system chart table.

[Source Chart Table]


Tabs

8-7 8 Chart Portfolio


[System Chart Table]

“-” mark

“+” mark

Yes: Imported chart is already merged with the original chart.


No: Imported chart is not merged with the original chart. It can be merged
on the ECDIS main screen using the “Accept S-57 Updates” menu.

How to select the charts (files) in the System Chart table:


For example, select the chart in the folder “n30120 as follows:
1) Left-lick the folder “S-57” twice quickly.
Then, the folders included in the folder “S-57” open.
2) Left-click the folder “lon120” twice quickly.
Then, the folders included in the folder “lon120” open.
3) Left-click the folder “n30120”.
Then, the charts included in the folder “n30120” are displayed in the table as shown.
4) Left-click one of the charts in the table.
• To close the folder “S-57”, left-click it twice quickly.

You can also open/close the folders using the “+” and “-” marks in the folder tree.
• Left-click the “+” mark to open the subfolders included in that folder.
• Left-click the “-” mark to close the subfolder included in that folder.

8 Chart Portfolio 8-8


8.3 Overview Flowchart
Overview flowcharts for chart portfolio operations are shown below:

(1) Importing S-57 charts

Start

Insert the CD and load


source charts (8.5.1)
If the CD path is incorrect:
Detailed settings
(8.9.6)

Import (8.5.2)

End

(2) Importing C-MAP charts

Start
8
Insert the CD and load
source charts (8.5.1)
If the CD path is incorrect:
Detailed settings
(8.9.6)

If the chart authorization has not been registered:


Obtaining an
authorization (8.4.2)

When using the selectable filter:


Selectable filter
settings (8.6 and 8.7)

Import (8.5.2)

End

8-9 8 Chart Portfolio


(3) Importing ARCS charts

Start

Insert the CD and load


source charts (8.5.1)
If the CD path is incorrect:
Detailed settings
(8.9.6)

If the chart authorization has not been registered:


Obtaining an
authorization (8.4.3)

Import (8.5.2)

End

8.4 Obtaining an Authorization (S-57 Primar/C-MAP/ARCS)


An authorization must be obtained in advance if you wish to import S-57 Primar/C-MAP/ARCS charts.

8.4.1 Getting Permission (For S-57 Primar) (Currently not available)


1) Select [Edit] - [Enter Cell Permit (S-57 Primar)] in that order.
Then, the “Input Password” panel opens.

*Default password: blank

8 Chart Portfolio 8-10


2) Enter the password and left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, the “Enter Cell Permit” panel opens.

• Cell Permit: Enter the Cell Permit ID code


• Left-click either “Subscription Permit” or “Single Purchase Permit” and enter the edition to the Edition
entry box.

3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.


Proceed to 8.5 “Importing/Updating the Source Charts (For S-57/C-MAP/ARCS)”.
8
8.4.2 Getting Permission (For C-MAP)
1) Select [Chart] - [C-MAP] - [Regist/Confirm User/Authorization Code] in that order.
Then, the “C-MAP Authorization Wizard” panel opens.

Select one of options explained below by left-clicking it and then left-click the [Next >] button.

First use C-MAP, or change subscription zones/areas:


Operation flow will be as follows:
1) Getting the user code for selecting the zone/area.
2) Sending it to the C-MAP.
3) Getting the authorization code from C-MAP and enters it.

8-11 8 Chart Portfolio


Register AUTHORIZATION CODE received from C-MAP:
• When the [Next >] button is left-clicked, the following wizard panel opens.

1)

2)

1) Enter the received authorization code.


2) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

Confirm subscription zones/area, and USER/AUTHORIZATION CODE:


• When the [Next >] button is left-clicked, the following wizard panel opens.

1)

2)
1) Enter your authorization code.
2) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

8 Chart Portfolio 8-12


8.4.3 Importing/Registering the Chart Permit (ARCS)
1) Select [Chart] - [ARCS] - [Import/Regist Chart Permit] in that order.
Then, the “Import/Enter Chart Permit” panel opens.

Select one of the options by left-clicking it.


• Search FD, CD, and so on:
When you have ARCS Chart Permit FD, you can use this option. Left-click the [Browse] button and
select the FD drive.
• Enter manually: 8
Enter the chart name and Char Permit.
• [Apply]:
Saves the entered chart name and Chart Permit to the local chart permit file .

2) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

Useful view menus:


You can view the ARCS license information. See 8.8.3 “Viewing the ARCS License Information”.

8.4.4 ARCS Chart Permit FD Backup


1) Select [Chart] - [ARCS] - [Backup Chart Permit] in that order.
Then, the panel will open to guide you for copying the backup ARCS chart permit FD.

8-13 8 Chart Portfolio


8.5 Importing/Updating the Source Charts (For S-57/C-MAP/ARCS)
Before importing/updating the source charts on the CD-ROM, see 8.9 “Setting the Options” since you can select
various options related to importing/updating.

8.5.1 Reading the Source Charts


1) Insert a CD-ROM containing charts into the CD-ROM drive of the ECDIS. Be sure that the source charts
of the CD-ROM are shown in the source chart table in the Chart Portfolio main screen. (They will be
automatically read from the CD-ROM and displayed there.)

(Source charts list read from the CD-ROM)

• If not, be sure the chart type selected in the Chart menu, load the CD-ROM, and left-click the [Auto
Detect] button. Then, the source charts will be displayed.

Selectable chart types

Useful operations on this screen:


• [System Chart] : Left-click this tab to view the system chart table.
• [Information]: Left-click this button to display the information of the selected (left-clicked) chart in
the source/system chart table.
• [Auto Detect]: Left-click this button to re-read the source charts from the CD-ROM.
• Editing menus: For editing (Selectable Filter ON/OFF, Select All source chart, and Delete system
chart), see 8.6 “Editing Operations (For S-57 Primar Online/C-MAP)”.
• Filtering menus: For filtering the source charts, see 8.7 “Filtering the Source Charts (For S-57 Primar
Online/C-MAP)”.

8 Chart Portfolio 8-14


8.5.2 Importing/Updating Operation
Initially, all source charts will be selected in the source chart table. If you want to select one chart, select by
left-clicking it. (To select all source charts again, select [Edit] - [Select All] in that order.)
1) Left-click the [Log View] button.
Then, the blank table will appear on the right side of the Chart Portfolio main screen for displaying the
processing status/logs.
2) Left-click the [Import/Update] button to start conversion.
Then, the “Input Condition” panel opens.

• Horizontal datum: Left-click the drop-down list button and left-click one of geodetic systems. Nor-
mally, select “WGS-84” (initial setting).
• Projection: Use the “Mercator” (initial setting).
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.
Then, conversion starts, and progress meter and logs in process are shown on the right side of the Chart
Portfolio main screen.
First, checking process takes place and then the importing/updating process succeeds it. 8
[Checking Process]

[Importing Process]

8-15 8 Chart Portfolio


Operation during checking/importing process:
• [Abort]: Left-clicking this button will aborts the current process.

4) After conversion, the following screen will be displayed.


In this example, you can see that the 14 charts are converted successfully. If any error occurs, it will be
displayed on the table.

5) You have finished conversion. To exit the Char Portfolio mode, left-click the [Exit] button. (See 8.1-(3)
“Exiting the Chart Portfolio mode”.

8 Chart Portfolio 8-16


8.6 Editing Operations (For S-57 Primar Online/C-MAP)
(Primar is not currently available)
8.6.1 Selectable Filter ON/OFF Selection (Selectable Filter)
To enable selectable filter which is used to filter the source charts displayed in the source chart table, you need
to set the selectable filter to ON state beforehand.
1) Select [Edit] - [Selectable Filter] in that order.
Each time you select it, “Selectable Filter” is turned ON and OFF. When it is selected, the check mark is
attached to “Selectable Filter”.

8.6.2 Selecting all Source Charts (Select All)


1) Select [Edit] - [Select All] in that order.
Then, the all cell/zones in the source chart table are selected for importing/updating.

8.6.3 Deleting the System Chart (Delete)


1) Select [Edit] - [Delete] in that order. 8
You can delete the selected system chart.

8.7 Filtering the Source Charts (For S-57Primar Online/C-MAP)


You can filter the source charts in the source chart table using various conditions. With this function, you can easily
find the charts you want to import/update.

1) Be sure that the selectable filter function is set to ON state. See 8.6.1-(1) “Selectable Filter ON/OFF
Selection (Selectable Filter)” mentioned above.
2) Be sure that the source chart table is open. If not, left-
click the “Source Charts” tab in the Chart Portfolio
main screen.
3) Select [Tool] - [Selectable Filter] in that order.
Then, the “Selectable Filter” panel opens.

8-17 8 Chart Portfolio


Select filtering conditions by left-clicking the options.
• Zone (for C-MAP): Select one of items by left-clicking it.
• Area (for S-57 Primar online) : (Primar is not currently available)
[Edit]: Use this button as follows:
a) Left-click the [Edit] button to open the “Edit Area” panel.
(If you left-click this button for the first time, the panel contents will be blank. Otherwise,
the selected contents will be displayed for editing.)

b) Enter the name and values.


• Name: Your favorite name for the area
• Latitudes/Longitudes: Enter values to determine the area to be selected.
c) Left-click the [OK] button. Then, the entered “Name” will be displayed on the “Selectable
Filter” panel.

[Add New Area]:


Use this button to add a new area.
a) Left-click the [Add New Area] button to open the same “Edit Area” panel as above.
b) Enter the name and values in the same way as above.

To clear the entered area:


a) Select a name you want to delete in the “Selectable Filter” panel.
b) Left-click the [Edit] button to open the “Edit Area” panel.
c) Clear the current name so that the name box is blank.
d) Left-click the [OK] button to return to the “Selectable Filter” panel.

4) Left-click the [OK] button to close the “Selectable Filter” panel.


When the system enters the Chart Portfolio mode or when you left-click the [Auto Detect] button, the
source charts are filtered with the set filtering condition, and thus filtered source charts are displayed in the
source chart table.

8 Chart Portfolio 8-18


8.8 View Operations
8.8.1 Getting Chart Information ([Information])
You can get information about the source chart or system chart.
1) Left-click one of charts in the source/system chart table, and then, left-click the [Information] button on
the screen.
Then, the “Chart Information” panel opens.
You can see the detailed information on that chart.

2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the panel.

8-19 8 Chart Portfolio


8.8.2 Viewing the Cell Permit Information (For S-57 Primar)
1) Select one of the source charts in the source chart table.
2) Select [View] - [Cell Permit Information (S-57 Primar)] in that order.
Then, the information panel will open.
3) Left-click the [Close] button to close the panel.

8.8.3 Viewing the ARCS License Information (For ARCS)


1) Select [View] - [ARCS License Information] in that order.
Then, the validity of the ARCS license on the chart permit file (ARCS chart permit FD) is checked.
When it is valid, the license information panel is display. Otherwise, an error message will be displayed.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the panel.

8.8.4 Viewing the Version Information of the Chart Portfolio


1) Select [Version] - [Chart Portfolio Version Information] in that order.
Then, the version information panel will be displayed.
2) Left-click the [Close] button to close the panel.

8 Chart Portfolio 8-20


8.9 Setting the Options
You can change various settings with the “Option” panel.

8.9.1 [S-57] Accepting Chart Update


1) Select [Tool] - [Option] in that order.
Then, the “Option” panel opens.
2) Left-click the “S-57” tab to the “S-57” panel as shown above.

Left-click either option.


8
• in Route Monitoring: Updating of the chart is not performed until you merge it on the ECDIS main
screen. In this case, you can merge the updating chart on the ECDIS main screen.
To merge it, “Accept S-57 Updates” menu will be used. For detailed descriptions,
see 3.11 “Displaying/Accepting the Updating S-57 Chart”.

• in Chart Portfolio: Updating is done in the Chart Portfolio. Namely, the updating charts are merged
with the original charts stored in the system after importing. The “Accepted” col-
umn in the system chart table shows whether the updating chart is already merged
or not. (“Yes” in the Accepted column shows that the imported chart is already
merged with the original chart. While, “No” shows that the imported chart is not
merged with the original chart yet.)

Select either “Every Media” or “Every Chart” by left-clicking it.

3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the “Option” panel.

8-21 8 Chart Portfolio


8.9.2 Setting the S-57 Primar Options (Primar is not currently available)
1) Select [Tool] - [Option] in that order.
Then, the “Option” panel opens.
2) Left-click the “S-57 Primar” tab to open the “S-57 Primar” panel.

Shows User ID.

• Automatic Importing/Updating after downloading charts:


• Online (Use LAN/Use Dial-up):
• [Modify Password] button:
Left-click this button when you want to change the current password to the new one. The “Modify
Password” panel opens.

a) Enter the current password, new password, and re-enter the new password.
b) Left-click the [OK] button to close the “Modify Password” panel.

3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the “Option” panel.

8 Chart Portfolio 8-22


8.9.3 Setting the C-MAP Options
1) Select [Tool] - [Option] in that order.
Then, the “Option” panel opens.
2) Left-click the “C-MAP” tab to open the “C-MAP” panel.

Shows one of the license statuses.


• “You are Licensed.”
• “You are NOT licensed.”
• “You not register Authorization code.”

Select one of options, “List and select Zone (Recommend)” or “List and select 20 deg Square”.
• List and select Zone (Recommend):
In the source chart table, source charts are displayed in the zone unit.
• List and select 20 deg Square: 8
In the source chart table, source charts are displayed in 20x20 degrees unit.
• [Register, confirm User/Authorized Code] button:
Left-clicking this button will open the following “C-MAP Authorization Wizard” panel. For detailed
operation, see 8.4.2 “Getting Permission (For C-MAP)”.
After setting, left-click the [OK] button to close the panel.

3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the “Option” panel.

8-23 8 Chart Portfolio


8.9.4 Setting the ARCS Options
1) Select [Tool] - [Option] in that order.
Then, the “Option” panel opens.
2) Left-click the “ARCS” tab to open the “ARCS” panel.

Shows one of the license statuses.


• “You have xxx chart(s) license.”
xxx: Number of permission
• “You are NOT licensed.”

• [Import/Regist Chart Permit] button:


Left-clicking this button will open the “Import/Enter Chart/Permit” panel. For detailed operation, see
8.4.3 “Importing/Resistering the Chart Permit (For ARCS)”.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the “Option” panel.

8.9.5 Setting the Boot Options


You can set various options that determine the operation when the system enters the Chart Portfolio mode.
1) Select [Tool] - [Option] in that order.
Then, the “Option” panel opens.
2) Left-click the “Boot” tab to open the “Boot” panel.

You can select options by left-clicking them.


• Automatic Import/Update:
Importing/Updating is automatically made when the Chart Portfolio is started.
• Use Selectable Filter:
Source charts are filtered by the set filtering conditions when the Chart Portfolio is started.
• Use Operation Guidance Wizard:
Importing/Updating wizard opens when the Chart Portfolio is started. (This option cannot be used when
“Automatic Import/Update” is selected.
3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the “Option” panel.

8 Chart Portfolio 8-24


8.9.6 Setting the Advanced Options
1) Select [Tool] - [Option] in that order.
Then, the “Option” panel opens.
2) Left-click the “Advanced” tab to open the “Advanced” panel.

Select the following option by left-clicking it.


• Sounds alarm (beep) after importing/updating completed:
You can enable or disable the alarm (beep sound) when importing/updating is completed.
• [Advanced Option] button: 8
The “Advanced Option” panel opens. To close it left-click the [OK] button.

Specify the S-57 source chart


path.

Specify the C-MAP source


chart path.

Specify the ARCS source


chart path.

If you use multiple CD-Rs to in-


stall C-MAP, copy all informa-
tion from the CD-Rs to the work
area before installation.

3) Left-click the [OK] button to close the “Option” panel.

8-25 8 Chart Portfolio


9
Playback
Operation
In the Playback mode, you can play back the logging data. In this mode, the screen is almost the same as for ECDIS
main. Also, the menu bar on the screen is the same as for the ECDIS main screen except for the [(9) Playback]
menu. Though the other menus are the same, there are some submenus you cannot use in the Playback mode.

9.1 Entering/Exiting the Playback Mode

(1) Entering the Playback mode


1) Turn ON the power by pressing the [PWR] key on the operation panel.
The startup menu appear on the display.

Navigation
E Planning

C Chart Portforio

P Playback

[Startup Menu]

2) Move the cursor with the trackball and left-click the “Playback” in the startup menu.
Almost the same screen as for ECDIS will open and the “Staring Date/Time” panel is displayed.

Note: If nothing is selected in the startup menu for 10 seconds, the system automatically enters the “ECDIS
Main” and the ECDIS main screen is display.

Special menu for playback mode:


In the ECDIS main screen, [(9) Maintenance] is used. However, in the Playback mode, [(9) Playback] is used,
instead.

Displays the “Starting Date/Time” panel.


Starts/Restarts the playback.
Pauses the playback.
Stops the playback.
Turns ON/OFF the Playback panel.

(2) Exiting the Playback mode


1) Left-click the [(0) Exit] menu and terminate the system in the same way as for ECDIS main screen.

9 Playback Operation 9-2


• Display panels for playback operation

[For S-57/C-MAP] [For ARCS]

9-3 9 Playback Operation


9.2 Playing Back the Logging Data
(1) Setting the starting date/time to be played back
1) Select [MENU] - [(9) Playback] - [(1) Starting Date/Time] in that order.
Then, the “Starting Date/Time” panel opens. (Initially, this screen is displayed.)

Logging data drop-down list*1

Date and time of recording end


Date and time of recording start

Selection of date and time to be played


back*2
(You can select date and time by sliding
the scroll bar or entering the values.)

*1 (Logging data): A series of logging files in which the logging date is continuing.
*2: Used to designate playback start time. During playback, the date and time that were recorded are
displayed.

2) Specify the above items to select the logging data to be played back, and then left-click the [OK] button.

(2) Displaying the Playback Panel


1) Select [MENU] - [(9) Playback] - [(5) Playback Panel] in that order.
Each time you select this menu, the “Playback” panel is turned ON and OFF. When it is ON, the panel
appears in the display panel.
Note that, depending on the playback status, some buttons are inactive.

[Pause] Button

[Start] Button [Stop] Button

[Date/Time] Button
Left-clicking this button will open the “Start Date/
Time” panel as shown above.

Playback Speed Select Button


Left-click this drop-down list button and then select the playback
speed you want by left-clicking it.

• Even if the “Playback Panel” is closed, you can start, pause, or stop the playback from the menu.

9 Playback Operation 9-4


(3) Starting playback
1) Left-click the [Start] button.
Then, playback starts at the speed you have selected in the “Playback Panel”.

Notes on Playback:
The time, date, and other information are not the current ones but the recorded ones as the logging data.

Playback Statues:
• Stop: STOP Shows “STOP” in red.

• During playback: PLAY Shows “PLAY” in red.

• When paused: PAUSE Shows “PAUSE” in red.

2) To terminate the playback operation, left-click the [Stop] button.


• To pause the playback, left-click the [Pause] button.
To cancel the pause, left-click the [Start] button again. 9

9-5 9 Playback Operation


10
Maintenance
and
Inspection
There are no customer-serviceable parts inside.
Inspections and repairs carried out by unauthorized personnel can cause fire or
electric shock.
Refer such repairs and inspections to subsidiaries, branch offices sales departments
or representatives of Japan Radio Co., Ltd.

Before starting inspection, be sure to turn the power switch OFF.


Failure to do so might cause fire or malfunction.

When you clean the front of the unit, do not use paint thinner, benzene or other
organic solvents.
Doing so might damage the paintwork.
Wipe off any dirt and dust on the front of the unit with a clean cloth, and wipe dry.

Do not rub the surface of the LCD strongly with a dry cloth. Do not use benzene,
alcohol, gasoline, thinner, and the like for cleaning the LCD. Use of those items will
cause the LCD surface to be damaged and deteriorated. Be sure to use a soft cloth
for wiping dirt off the surface of the tube lightly.

Turn off this equipment when displayed on the LCD screen "FAN" alarm message
and ask quickly our company's service man for repair fan motor. Otherwise this
equipment may be fired or damaged.

10 Maintenance and Inspection 10-2


10.1 Daily Maintenance
The service life of the unit is greatly affected by how well it is maintained and inspected during daily maintenance.
To ensure that the unit is kept in optimum condition, we recommend that you inspect it daily. This also prevents the
unit from malfunctioning.
Inspect the unit according to the items indicated in the table below.

Maintenance and Inspection Method

Caution
Before starting inspection, be sure to turn the power switch OFF.
Failure to do so might cause fire or malfunction.

No. Item Inspection Item

1 Cleaning • Wipe off any dirt from the monitor display lightly with a soft, dry cloth.
• Wipe off any dirt on the main unit case lightly with a dry cloth. In particular,
wipe air vents carefully with a brush to improve air circulation.

2 Inspection • Turn the [BRILLIANCE] knob CW on the operation panel to make sure that
the brightness of the monitor increases.
• Turn the [BRILLIANCE] knob CCW on the operation panel to make sure
that the brightness of the monitor increases.
• Make sure that the trackball operates smoothly.
• Press the [EBL] and [VRM] dials on the operation panel to make sure that
dials operate smoothly.
• Press the [PANEL] key on the operation panel to make sure that the lighting
on the panel changes correctly.

10
10.2 Troubleshooting
If the unit is not working properly, check the following points and carry out the appropriate repair before you ask for
repair.
If the following remedies do not rectify the problem, or a location not mentioned in the following tables is not in
order, contact the nearest JRC office or agent, and ask for repair.

Symptom Cause Remedy

Power does not turn ON. The AC power is not ON. Turn the AC power ON.

AC power is not being input Input AC power within the rated


within the rated range. range.

The AC power cable is not con- Call the JRC sales representative
nected to the main unit. for repair.

Malfunction of main unit. Call the JRC sales representative


for repair.

10-3 10 Maintenance and Inspection


Symptom Cause Remedy

"POWER FAIL" lamp is lit. DC power is not being supplied Supply DC power from the dis-
from the distribution board. tribution board.

The AC voltage has dropped. Input AC voltage within the rated


range.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

"FAN" alarm message is displayed on the The fan motor has stopped. Immediately turn the power OFF,
LCD monitor. and contact the nearest JRC of-
fice or agent, and ask for repair.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

Nothing is displayed on screen. The power switch is not ON. Turn the power switch ON.

The monitor has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative


for repair.

The video cable is not connected. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

Sandstorm-like clutter on screen The monitor has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

The video cable is not connected. Call the JRC sales representative
(terminal fault) for repair.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

Screen distortion The monitor is not correctly ad- Call the JRC sales representative
justed. for repair.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

Incorrect display The video cable is not connected. Call the JRC sales representative
(terminal fault) for repair.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

Radar echo is not displayed correctly. The video cable is not connected. Call the JRC sales representative
(terminal fault) for repair.

The connector cable is not con- Call the JRC sales representative
nected to the radar. for repair.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

10 Maintenance and Inspection 10-4


Symptom Cause Remedy

Gyro compass is not displayed, and The initial setup has not been car- Carry out the initial setup cor-
"GYRO" alarm is displayed. ried out correctly. rectly.

The gyro compass is not ON. Turn the gyro compass ON.

The connector cable is not con- Check the connection between


nected to the gyro compass. the gyro compass and main unit.

The ratio setting on the gyro com- Set the ratio setting on the gyro
pass is incorrect. compass correctly.

The polarities of the connector Connect the cable at the correct


cable are incorrect. polarities.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

Rudder angle is not displayed. Or, is not The rudder angle indicator is not Turn the rudder angle indicator
displayed correctly. ON. ON.

The ratio setting on the rudder Set the ratio setting on the rudder
angle is incorrect. angle.

The rudder angle indicator setting Set the rudder angle indicator cor-
is incorrect. rectly.

The connector cable is not con- Check the connection between


nected to the rudder angle indi- the rudder angle indicator and the
cator. main unit.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative

Log is not displayed. The log is not ON.


for repair.

Turn the log ON.


10
The ratio setting on the log is in- Set the ratio setting on the log
correct. correctly.

The connector cable is not con- Check the connection between


nected to the log. the log and the main unit.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

10-5 10 Maintenance and Inspection


Symptom Cause Remedy

The following analog data is not dis- The analog data setup has not Carry out the analog data setup
played: been set correctly. correctly.
• Relative wind direction and wind speed
• Air temperature The interface board is not ON. Turn the interface board ON.
• Relative humidity
• Water temperature The connector cable is not con- Check the connection between
• Main engine temperature nected to the interface board. the interface board and the main
• Pitch unit.
• Roll
• Bow displacement The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
• Midsection displacement for repair.
• Stern displacement
• Engine start pressure
• Turbo charger RPM
• Main engine RPM
• BHP/SHP
• Torque
• CPP angle

Position information (e.g. GPS, gyro) is The initial setup has not been car- Carry out the initial setup cor-
not displayed. ried out correctly. rectly.

The navigation unit is not mea- Check the state of the navigation
suring. unit.

The navigation unit is not ON. Turn the navigation unit ON.

The connector cable is not con- Check the connection between


nected to the navigation unit. the navigation unit and the main
unit.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

ARPA is not displayed. The [ARPA] key is not pressed. Press the [ARPA] key.

The ARPA setting is incorrect. Set the ARPA setting correctly.

The radar is not turned ON. Turn the radar ON.

The connector cable is not con- Check the connection between


nected to the radar. the radar and main unit.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

10 Maintenance and Inspection 10-6


Symptom Cause Remedy

Wind direction, wind speed (digital wind The digital wind direction and air Turn the digital wind direction
direction and air speedometer) are not speedometer are not ON. and air speedometer ON.
displayed.
The connector cables are not con- Check the connection between
nected to the digital wind direc- the digital wind direction and air
tion and air speedometer. speedometer.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

UKC is not displayed. The depth sounder is not ON. Turn the depth sounder ON.

The connector cable is not con- Check the connection between


nected to the depth sounder. the depth sounder and the main
unit.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

Engine data from data logger and The data logger is not ON. Turn the data logger ON.
weather data are not displayed.
The connector cable is not con- Check the connection between
nected to the data logger. the main unit and the data logger.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

Automatic sailing is not possible. The initial setup has not been car- Carry out the initial setup cor-
ried out correctly. rectly.

Operation is not carried out cor- Carry out the correct operation
rectly. referring to the Instruction
Manual. 10
The autopilot is not ON. Turn the autopilot ON.

The connector cable is not con- Check the connection between


nected to the autopilot. the autopilot and the main unit.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

The brightness does not change even if The lighting control circuit does Call the JRC sales representative
the [BRILLIANCE] knob is turned. not work. for repair.

The cable is damaged. Call the JRC sales representative


for repair.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

10-7 10 Maintenance and Inspection


Symptom Cause Remedy

None of the keys on the operation panel The cursor is displayed as an Wait until the hourglass returns to
work. hourglass. a cursor.

The operation panel circuit is Call the JRC sales representative


malfunctioning. for repair.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

The trackball does not work. The trackball is dirty. Clean the trackball.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

The [EBL] and [VRM] dials do not work The [EBL] and [VRM] dials are Press the [EBL]/[VRM] keys.
even if turned. Or, response is slow. not ready for operation.

The knob is not secured to the Use a hexagonal wrench to secure


shaft. the knob to the shaft.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

The [GAIN], [ECHO], [BRILL], The [GAIN], [ECHO], Press the [RADAR] key.
[ANTI-CLUTTER] and [SEA/RAIN] [BRILL], [ANTI-CLUTTER]
dials do not work even if turned. Or, re- and [SEA/RAIN] dials are not
sponse is slow. ready for operation.

The knob is not secured to the Use a hexagonal wrench to secure


shaft. the knob to the shaft.

The main unit has malfunctioned. Call the JRC sales representative
for repair.

Earth meter or earth lamp lights. The 24 VDC minus line is Check the ground.
grounded to the ship's earth.

10 Maintenance and Inspection 10-8


11
Operating
Environment
To prevent breakdown and reduced service life, do not set up the unit in locations that are:

● Exposed to direct sunlight


Strong sunlight leads to rapid breakdown of the LCD.

● Exposed to water splashes.

● Poorly ventilated
Special care is required when the unit is installed in a waterproof case. An overheated rear panel may damage the
power supply.

11 Operating Environment 11-2


12
After-Sales
Service
12.1 When Asking for Service
When you think the system is not operating normally, see 10.2 “Troubleshooting”, and check again. If the problem
still cannot be corrected, turn off the unit and consult your dealer, our agent, branch, sales department or subsidiary
for advice. Use the warranty card.
See the list of sales offices at the end of this manual.

• Repair during warranty period


Should a malfunction occur when the fishfinder has been operated according to descriptions and instructions in
the instruction manual, it will be repaired free of charge. However, breakdowns resulting from abuse, negli-
gence, natural disaster, fire or other unforeseeable incident will be charged.

• Repair after warranty period


Repairs that restore normal operation made after the warranty period have to be paid in full by the client.

• Product data that should be provided when you ask for service
* Name of product, model, date of manufacture and serial number
* Description of malfunction (as detailed as possible)
* Company address or name of organization, address and telephone number

12.2 Checks and Inspection


Product performance gradually declines with long use resulting in inaccurate measurements, although the rate of
this decline varies with frequency of use.
To prevent this, periodic inspection is required in addition to routine maintenance. For information on inspection,
contact your dealer.
Note that inspection is charged.

Inquiries regarding after-sales service should be directed to JRC. Addresses and telephone numbers are listed on the
back cover of this manual.

12 After-Sales Service 12-2


12.3 Hardware Monitor
If the "Hardware Alarm Monitor" is displayed, this system detected something problem.

Please confirm this system as follows.

(1) Confirmation
1) Press the [GUARD] key with the [ALARM ACK] key.
2) The alarm button which related the problem is displayed in red. (CPU CRT Fan, POWER Fan or Battery
Low)
3) Confirm the alarm type displayed in red and execute the shut down process and power off the unit soon.
4) Please contact the nearest JRC office, or agent for repair.

(2) Meaning of alarm


1) CPU CRT Fan : Stop the blowing of CPU or monitor fun in CWB-1052 main unit.
(Need repair)
2) POWER Fan : Stop the blowing of power unit fun in CWB-1052 main unit.
(Need repair)
3) Battery Low : Power down of the UPS unit , cause of main AC power line.
(Check AC power line)

12

12-3 12 After-Sales Service


13
Disposal
Before you dispose of used lithium cells, insulate the terminals with tape. If the
terminals of lithium cells are not insulated, the backup battery may become
short-circuited, and generate heat, rupture or cause fire.

13.1 Disposal of the Product


● Dispose of the system in accordance with local bylaws and regulations.

13.2 Disposal of Used Batteries


Lithium cells for backing up data at built into the system.
● Do not store used lithium cells. Dispose of them as unburnable garbage.
● Used lithium cells must be insulated, for example, by insulating the terminals with tape before disposal.
In local authorities that collect unburnable and burnable garbage, dispose of used lithium cells in accordance
with local bylaws and regulations.
For details, contact the nearest JRC office, agent or your local authority.

13.3 Disposal of LCD Module


The fluorescent lamp built in the LCD module contains mercury. When disposing of the LCD module, you need to
observe the ordinances or regulations of your local government.

If the LCD module breaks and the internal liquid that flows out touches your skin,
rinse it off with flowing water for more than 15 minuets. If any symptom develops,
immediately see a doctor. If the liquid enters your eye, rinse it with flowing water for
more than 15 minuets and see a doctor without delay.

13 Disposal 13-2
14
Specifications
14.1 Bridge Display Terminal
(1) Display 21.3 inch color LCD
Resolution : 1280 x 1024

(2) Operation panel Keys and switches


Track ball
EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) dial
VRM (Variable Range Marker) dial
Joystick

(3) Processor CPU


Video card
LAN card
8-channel serial interface circuit
Gyro/log interface circuit
Radar interface circuit
Power supply circuit (including UPS)
RS-232/RS-422 conversion circuit
Terminal board circuit
Peripherals
• Hard disk drive
• CD-ROM drive
• Floppy disk drive (1.44 Mbyte)

(4) Environmental conditions IEC60945 Ver3.0 compliant

(5) Power voltage Voltage : 100 VAC, 110 VAC, 200 VAC, 220 VAC, VAC (±10%)
Frequency : 60 Hz/50Hz

14.2 Navigation Interface Board


The board is built into the bridge display terminal.

14 Specifications 14-2
14.3 Navigation Workstation (Option)
(1) Display 17 / 21 inch color display

(2) Operation panel Keyboard


Mouse

(3) Processor CPU


Video card
LAN card
Power supply circuit (including UPS)
Peripherals
• Hard disk drive
• CD-ROM drive
• Floppy disk drive (1.44 Mbyte)

(4) Power voltage Voltage : 100 VAC / 220VAC (±10%)


Frequency : 60 Hz /50 Hz

14

14-3 14 Specifications
Appendices
Appendix A : Alarm Fuction

List*3

List*4

Audible*5

Output*6

Logbook

Logging*7
Button*1 Message*2 Meaning*8 Condition*9

Alarm List - - - - - - - Always displayed. -


Green: No alarm
Red: Alarm occurred. (Blinks if not acknowledged
yet. Stays lit after acknowledgement.)
AUTO Automatic sailing failed ✔ 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Automatic sailing cannot be continued. During automatic
By one of the following causes: sailing
• POS1 error
• GYRO error
• Route error
CALL Generated Call-back ✔ 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ [A] Outputs a callback navigator alarm. Automatic sailing
navigator By one of the following causes: with an ANTS rout
• ECC alarm does not occur even after 30 seconds of
WOL.
• ACC alarm does not occur even after 30 seconds of
WOL.
Setup Gyro initial course not set ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Setting up is not completed. Always
By one of the following causes:
POS1 not select ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - • Initial course for step/synchro gyro is not set.
Safety contour not set ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - • Safety contour value is not set (default value
Shallow contour not set ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - unchanged).
Deep contour not set ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - • Shallow contour value is not set (default value
Safety depth not set ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - unchanged).
• Deep contour value is not set (default value
unchanged).
• Safety depth value is not set (default value
unchanged).
A/P Autopilot failed ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ Autopilot is defective or communication line is cut. Autopilot is
connected.
POS1 POS1 failed ✔ 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ POS1 (primary) is defective or communication line is Position measuring
✔ cut. instrument is
POS1 not fix ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ POS1 is not fixed. connected
(including DR).
POS1 not differential ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ POS1 is not set in differential mode. Connected position
measuring
instrument is of
differential type.
Datum is different ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ Geodetic system between chart and measured position Position measuring
information being received differs. instrument is
connected
(including DR).
POS2 POS2 failed ✔ 1 ✔ - ✔ ✔ POS2 (secondary) is defective or communication line Position measuring
is cut. instrument is
POS2 not fix ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ POS2 is not fixed. connected
(including DR).
POS2 not differential ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ POS2 is not set in differential mode. Connected position
measuring
instrument is of
differential type.
Datum is different ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ Geodetic system between chart and measured position Position measuring
information being received differs. instrument is
connected
(including DR).
JUMP POS1 shifted ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ The shift amount of the primary position exceeds the User setting
limit being set.
DIFF Position difference exceed ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ The difference between the primary and second User setting.
positions exceeds the limit being set. Position measuring
instrument is
connected to POS2
(including DR).
GYRO Gyro failed ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ Gyro is defective or its line is cut. Gyro is connected.
LOG Log failed ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ Log is defective or its line is cut. Log is connected.
LowSp Log speed is low ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ ✔ Log speed is lower than the limit. Automatic sail
with ANTS route.
ECC Arrived at Early Course ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ [A] Approaching WOL (1 to 6 minutes before arriving During ANTS
Change point at WOL) route navigation
ACC Arrived at Actual Course ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ [A] Approaching WOL (30 seconds before arriving at During ANTS
Change point WOL) route navigation
ARR Arrived at WP ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Arrived at the WP. During Normal
route navigation
OffCo Course difference exceed ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ The difference between the course and bearing During route
exceeds the limit. navigation

Appendices App-2
List*3

List*4

Audible*5

Output*6

Logbook

Logging*7
Button*1 Message*2 Meaning*8 Condition*9

XTE Cross track error exceed ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ The amount of the cross track error exceeds the limit. During route
navigation
Route Arrived at LAST WP ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ Arrived at the last WP. During route
navigation
Radar BP failed ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Rotation signal (BP) is out of specifications or signal During radar
line is cut. display
BZ failed ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Rotation signal (BZ)is out of specifications or signal During radar
line is cut. display
Trigger failed ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Trigger signal is out of specifications or signal line is During radar
cut. display
Video failed ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Video signal is out of specifications or signal line is During radar
cut. display
Rotation reversed ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Aerial is rotating in reverse. During radar
display
Internal error ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Error occurred in the board. During radar
display
ARPA1 ARPA 1 signal failed ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - ARPA1 is defective or signal line is cut. During ARPA1
display
ARPA2 ARPA 2 signal failed ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - ARPA2 is defective or signal line is cut. During ARPA2
display
Chart Loaded different datum ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Different datum chart is loaded. Always
chart
Loaded unknown datum ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - [ARCS] Unknown datum chart is loaded. Always
chart
Loaded Non-HO chart ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Non-HO chart is loaded. Always
Over Scale ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Over Scale Always
Larger Scale available ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Larger Scale available Always
Chart image is Zoom out ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - [ARCS] Low-resolution chart is displayed. Always
Select different safety ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - Different safety contour is selected. Always
contour
ARCS Security failed ✔ 3 ✔ - ✔ - [ARCS] An alarm related to ARCS security occurred. See B. "ARCS
Security Related
Alarm."
SafCon Crossing Safety Contour ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Safety Contour within set time. Always
AREA Crossing Traffic ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Traffic Separation Zone within settime. Vector=ON
Separation Zone (User setting)
Crossing Traffic Crossing ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Traffic Crossing within set time. Alarm item=ON
Crossing Traffic ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Traffic Roundabout within set time. (User setting)
Roundabout
Crossing Precautionary ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Traffic Precautionary within set time.
Crossing Two Way ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Two Way Traffic within set time.
Traffic
Crossing Deeper Water ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Deeper Water Route within set time.
Route
Crossing Recommended ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Recommended Traffic Lane within set
Traffic Lane time.
Crossing Inshore Traffic ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Inshore Traffic Zone within set time.
Zone
Crossing Fairway ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Fairway within set time.
Crossing Restricted Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Restricted Area within set time.
Crossing Caution Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Caution Area within set time.
Crossing Shore ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Shore Production Area within set time.
Production Area
Crossing Military Practice ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Military Practice Area within set time.
Area
Crossing Seaplane ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Seaplane Landing Area within set time.
Landing Area
Crossing Submarine ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Submarine transit lane within set time.
transit lane
Crossing Ice Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Ice Area within set time.
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Appendices

Crossing Channel 2 [V] Crossing Channel within set time.


Crossing Fishing Ground ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Fishing Ground within set time.
Crossing Fishing ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Fishing Prohibited within set time.
Prohibited
Crossing Pipeline Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Pipeline Area within set time.
Crossing Cable Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Cable Area within set time.
Crossing Anchorage Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Anchorage Area within set time.
Crossing Anchorage ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Anchorage Prohibited within set time.
Prohibited

App-3 Appendices
List*3

List*4

Audible*5

Output*6

Logbook

Logging*7
Button*1 Message*2 Meaning*8 Condition*9

AREA Crossing Spoil Ground ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Spoil Ground within set time. Vector=ON
Crossing Dumping ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Dumping Ground within set time. (User setting)
Ground Alarm item=ON
Crossing Dredge Area ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Dredge Area within set time. (User setting)
Crossing Cargo ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Cargo Transshipment Area within set
Transshipment Area ✔ time.
Crossing Incineration ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Incineration Area within set time.
Area
Crossing Specially ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [V] Crossing Specially Protected Areas within set
Protected Areas time.
DNG Approaching Obstruction ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [S] Approaching obstruction Sector=ON
(User setting)
Approaching Under water ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ [S] Approaching under-water rock
rock
Approaching Wreck ✔ 2 ✔ ✔ ✔ [S] Approaching wreck
Timer Timer ✔ 2 ✔ - ✔ - Time out Timer=ON
(User setting)
HARD i
AC power failed ✔ 1 ✔ AC voltage is low or AC power is not supplied. -
Battery is low voltage ✔ 1 ✔ UPS battery voltage is low.
CPU Fan failed ✔ 1 ✔ CPU fan is defective.
Power supply Fan failed ✔ 1 ✔ ✔ ✔ - Power supply fan is defective.
CPU Temp rising ✔ 1 ✔ CPU temperature is rising.
Inside Temp rising ✔ 1 ✔ Inside temperature is rising.

Appendices App-4
Remarks:
*1: Button
Button that will be displayed on the display panel when an alarm occurs. By left-clicking this button,
alarm acknowledgement is made for that button alarm.
*2: Message (detailed description of alarm)
When an alarm occurs, the alarm button blinks in red. At the same time, the detailed description of the
alarm is displayed in the message box at the bottom of the chart display area. When the [ALARM
ACK] key on the operation panel is pressed to acknowledge the alarm, the blinking alarm stops and
stays lit. The following table shows the alarm display on the button, in the message box and the
“Alarm List” panel. The “Alarm List” panel opens when the [Alarm List] button is left-clicked. (See
3.3.7 “How to Release the Alarm ([ALARM ACK])”.)

Alarm button [Alarm List] button

[Alarm buttons on the display panel]


Example: Setup alarm --- Initial course of the gyro is not set. Also, POS1 is not selected.

Button/panel No alarm Alarm occurred Alarm acknowledged For unused alarm


[Alarm List] button Lights in green Blinks in red Stays lit in red -

Alarm button No display Setup (Blinks in red.) Setup (Stays lit in red.) No display

In the message box No display Gyro initial course not set No display No display
POS1 not select

"Alarm List" panel Button Setup (Lights in green) Setup (Blinks in red.) Setup (Stays lit in red.) Inactive

Description Gyro initial course not set (Blinks in red.) (Stays lit in red.) Inactive
POS1 not select Gyro initial course not set Gyro initial course not set
POS1 not select POS1 not select

*3: An alarm shown in the “Alarm List” panel.


*4: Level of alarm (1: High, 2: Mid, 3: Low)
*5: Audible sound from the equipment and dedicated keyboard (The sounding pattern varies with the
level of alarm.)
*6: Output supports serial interface and network interface.
*7: Log data recorded for playback function.
*8: [A]: Alarm used for ANTS only, [V]: Alarm detected by the danger detection vector (vector area),
[S]: Alarm detected by the guard ring (sector area)
*9: Condition to detect an alarm may depend on the hardware to be used.
Appendices

App-5 Appendices
Appendix B : ARCS Security Related Alarm
Message Meaning Timing

ARCS01: The contents of the GB.LCN file have been Invalid license (License has been altered.) At startup time of ECDIS Main.
altered. You may be in breach of the licens- When PIN of ARCS Index Access is checked.
ing arrangements that relate to the use of the
chart. License is invalid. Please contact your
ARCS agent/distributor to correct this error

ARCS02: Chart Chart#. Chart Permit corrupted. Please Abnormal chart permission When decryption is made for displaying the
reload original media. chart.

ARCS08: Warning - License expired in less than one The term of validity for license (chart permis- When decryption is made for displaying the
month. Please contact your ARCS agent for sion) is less than one month. chart.
a license renewal

ARCS09 Chart Chart#. Warning - License expired. Expired license (chart permission). (Less than When decryption is made for displaying the
The displayed chart may not be up to date. one month) chart.
Contact your Agent to arrange for a license
renewal.

ARCS10: Chart Chart#. License expired. ARCS charts Expired license (chart permission). (More than When decryption is made for displaying the
can not be displayed. Contact your ARCS one month) chart.
agent for a license renewal.

ARCS11: Chart Chart#. The loaded version of this Encryption version for the chart is older than When decryption is made for displaying the
chart is too old to be used with the license. that for license (chart permission). chart.
Please load a more recent version of the chart. Penc# > enc#
Chart version is Enc#, Permit version is
Penc#.

ARCS12: Chart Chart#. The license is too old to be Encryption version for license (chart permis- When decryption is made for displaying the
used with this version of the chart. Please sion) is older than that for the chart. chart.
contact your agent to obtain s new license. Penc# < enc#

ARCS13: Chart Chart#. The license is not valid for this Issue number of license (chart permission) is When decryption is made for displaying the
version of the chart. Either load the version smaller than that of the chart. chart.
with an issue number of Pseq# or contact Pseq# < seq#
your distributor to update your license.

ARCS14: Chart Chart#. The Loaded version of the Issue number of license (chart permission) is When decryption is made for displaying the
chart is older than the one for which the li- greater than that of the chart. chart.
cense is valid. Please load the more recent Pseq# > seq#
version with an issue number of Pseq#.

ARCS15: Chart Chart#. The license is not valid for this NM number of license (chart permission) is When decryption is made for displaying the
version of the chart. Please contact your dis- smaller than that of the chart. chart.
tributor to update your license. PNM# < NM#

ARCS16: Chart Chart#. Warning - License does not NM number of license (chart permission) is When decryption is made for displaying the
allow access to latest correctional informa- greater than that of the chart, and also it is chart.
tion. License is valid to NtoM correction smaller than that of the updating NM number.
PNM#. Updates are available for NtoM cor- PNM# > NM# AND PNM# < UNM#
rection UNM#. Please contact your ARCS
distributor to update license.

ARCS17: Chart Chart#. Warning - License is valid to NM number of license (chart permission) is When decryption is made for displaying the
NtoM correction PNM#. Corrections are greater than that of the chart, and also it is greater chart.
loaded to NtoM correction UNM#. Correc- than that of the updating NM number.
tions are missing. Please load update CD that PNM# > NM# AND PNM# > UNM#
contain NtoM correction PNM#.

ARCS18: Chart Chart#. Warning - License is valid to NM number of license (chart permission) is When decryption is made for displaying the
NtoM correction PNM#. The Chart is cor- greater than that of the chart, and also no updat- chart.
rect to NtoM correction NM#. Corrections ing data exists.
are missing. Please load update CD that con- PNM# > NM# AND "No updating data"
tains NtoM correction PNM#.

#: Name, ID, or number will be displayed.

Appendices App-6
Appendix C : Abbreviation for Geodetic System
No. Abbreviation Description No. Abbreviation Description
1 WGS-72 World Geodetic System 1972 56 KAN Kandawala
2 WGS-84 World Geodetic System 1984 57 KEG Kerguelen Island 1949
3 EUR European 1950 58 KEA Kertau 1948
4 ADI Adindan 59 KUS Kusaie Astro 1951
5 AFG Afgooye 60 LCF L. C. 5 Astro 1961
6 AIN Ain el Abd 1970 61 LEH Leigon
7 ANO Anna 1 Astro 1965 62 LIB Liberia 1964
8 AIA Antigua Island Astro 1943 63 LUZ Luzon
9 ARF Arc 1950 64 MIK Mahe 1971
10 ARS Arc 1960 65 MAS Massawa
11 ASC Ascension Island 1958 66 MER Merchich
12 ATF Astro beacon “E” 1945 67 MID Midway Astro 1961
13 SHB Astro DOS 71/4 68 MIN Minna
14 TRN Astro Tern Island (FRIG) 1961 69 ASM Montserrat Island Astro 1958
15 ASQ Astronomical Station 1952 70 MPO M'Poraloko
16 AUA Australian Geodetic 1966 71 NAH Nahrwan
17 AUG Australian Geodetic 1984 72 NAP Naparima, BWI
18 PHA Ayabelle Lighthouse 73 NAS North American 1927
19 IBE Bellevue (IGN) 74 NAR North American 1983
20 BER Bermuda 1957 75 FLO Observatorio Meteorologico 1939
21 BID Bissau 76 OEG Old Egyptian 1907
22 BOO Bogota Observatory 77 OHA Old Hawaiian
23 BUR Bukit Rimpah 78 FAH Oman
24 CAZ Camp Area Astro 79 OGB Ordnance Survey of Great Britain
25 CAI Campo Inchauspe 1969 1936
26 CAO Canton Astro 1966 80 PLN Pico de las Nieves
27 CAP Cape 81 PIT Pitcairn Astro 1967
28 CAC Cape Canaveral 82 PTB Point 58
29 CGE Carthage 83 PTN Pointe Noire 1948
30 CHI Chatam Island Astro 1971 84 POS Porto Santo 1936
31 CHU Chua Astro 85 PRP Provisional South American 1956
32 COA Corrego Alegre 86 HIT Provisional South Chilean 1963
33 DAL Dabola (also known as Hito XVIII 1963)
34 BAT Djakarta (Batavia) 87 PUR Puerto Rico
35 GIZ DOS 1968 88 QAT Qatar national
36 EAS Easter Island 1967 89 QUO Qornoq
37 EUS European 1979 90 REU Reunion
38 FOT Fort Thomas 1955 91 MOD Rome 1940
39 GAA Gan 1970 92 SAE Santo (DOS) 1965
40 GEO Geodetic Datum 1949 93 SAO Sao Braz
41 GRA Graciosa Base SW 1948 94 SAP Sapper Hill 1943
42 GUA Guam 1963 95 SCK Schwarzeck
43 GSE Gunung Segara 96 SGM Selvagem Grande 1938
44 DOB GUX 1 Astro 97 SAN South American 1969
45 HEN Herat North 98 SOA South Asia
46 HJO Hjorsey 1955 99 TAN Tananarive Observatory 1925
Appendices

47 HKD Hong Kong 1963 100 TIL Timbalai 1948


48 HTN Hu-Tzu-Shan 101 TOY Tokyo
49 IND Indian 102 TDC Tristan Astro 1968
50 INF Indian 1954 103 MVS Viti Levu 1916
51 INH Indian 1975 104 ENW Wake-Eniwetok 1960
52 TRL Ireland 1965 105 WAK Wake Island Astro 1952
53 ISG ISTS 061 Astro 1968 106 YAC Yacare
54 IST ISTS 073 Astro 1969 107 ZAN Zanderij
55 JOH Johnston Island 1961

App-7 Appendices
Index
A Display color ([DAY/NIGHT]) ............................ 3-19
Abbreviation for geodetic system ..................... App-7 Display panel ................................................... 2-4, 2-5
Abort ....................................................................... 3-7 Disposal ................................................................ 13-2
Accepting S57 updating chart .............................. 3-53
Adjusting datum (ARCS) ..................................... 3-49 E
After-sales service ................................................ 12-2 EBL maneuver ...................................................... 3-81
AIS symbols ....................................................... 3-112 EBL/VRM (route planning) ................................. 4-39
Alarm ([ALARM ACK]) ...................................... 3-19 EBL/VRM using menu ........................................ 3-70
Alarm function .................................................. App-2 EBL/VRM using operation panel ........................ 3-70
Alarm history ........................................................ 3-22 ECDIS screen ....................................................... 3-17
Alarm list panel .................................................... 3-21 Environment ......................................................... 11-2
Alphabetical input ................................................ 3-11 Event mark (EVENT) .......................................... 3-54
Alternate route ...................................................... 4-42
Alternate route editing mode ............................... 4-44 F
Analog meter ........................................................ 3-63 Features .................................................................. 1-3
ARCS chart display .............................................. 3-44 File manager ........................................................... 7-2
ARCS security related alarm ............................ App-6 Filter (AIS target) ............................................... 3-112
Area (user chart) ................................................... 5-27 Filter (chart portfolio) .......................................... 8-17
ARPA symbols ................................................... 3-112 Filter (Navtex message) ....................................... 3-92
ARPA/AIS list ...................................................... 3-26 Flowchart - Alternate route .................................. 4-42
ARPA/AIS target display ON/OFF ([ARPA]) ..... 3-25 Flowchart - User chart file ..................................... 5-7
ARPA/AIS target panel ........................................ 3-29 Flowchart - Graphic editor ................................... 4-27
Auto sailing status panel ........................................ 2-9 Flowchart (For sailing) ......................................... 3-13
Automatic sailing system ....................................... 6-2 Flowchart - Table editor ......................................... 4-9
Automatic sailing type ........................................... 6-7 Flowchart (General flow) ..................................... 3-12
Automatic sailing using ANTS Auto ..................... 6-8 Function of screen .................................................. 2-4
Automatic sailing using ANTS Manual/Normal ... 6-10
Avoiding danger ................................................... 6-12 G
Azimuth mode ...................................................... 3-83 Getting permission (C-Map) ................................ 8-11
Getting Permission (S57-Primar) ......................... 8-10
B Graphic editing menu ........................................... 4-24
Bearing and speed settings ................................... 3-69 Graphic editing mode .................................. 4-23, 4-29
Brightness (Adjustment) ...................................... 3-18 Graphic editor (route planning) ........................... 4-23
Guard ring ............................................................ 3-67
C
Chart display area ................................................... 2-4 H
Chart editing menu ................................................. 5-4 Hardware monitor ................................................ 12-3
Chart editing mode .......................................... 5-3, 5-9 HDG vector .......................................................... 3-66
Chart panel ............................................................. 2-6 Heading Line ........................................................ 3-66
Chart portfolio ........................................................ 8-2 High resolution area (ARCS) ............................... 3-44
Chart symbol ........................................................ 3-96 High resolution chart (ARCS) ............................. 3-47
COG vector ........................................................... 3-66 Highlighting ......................................................... 3-58
Color pattern (S-57 Only) ...................................... 7-6 How to select menu ................................................ 3-3
Color pattern (ARCS) ............................................ 7-7
Components ............................................................ 1-4 I
Construction ........................................................... 1-5 Importing/Updating (S57/C-Map/ARCS)............ 8-14
Coordinated universal time (UTC) .................... 3-114 Information mark ................................................. 3-56
Cursors .................................................................... 3-3
L
D Left-click ................................................................ 3-3
Danger detection vector ....................................... 3-67 Lines (user chart) ................................................. 5-24
Depth alarm .......................................................... 3-99 Local mean time (LMT) ..................................... 3-114
Display area ............................................................ 2-4 Logbook ................................................................ 3-88
Low resolution chart (ARCS) .............................. 3-47

1/2 Index
M Shifting own ship position ................................. 3-115
Maintenance ......................................................... 10-3 Ship’s shape .......................................................... 3-65
Manual update ...................................................... 5-15 Shortcut menu ........................................................ 3-7
Menu operation ...................................................... 3-3 Sound Volume (Adjustment) ................................ 3-18
Menu title bar ................................................ 2-4, 2-10 Specifications ....................................................... 14-2
Menu tree .............................................................. 2-10 Startup menu ........................................................ 3-15
Merge (user chart) ................................................ 5-13 Startup screen ....................................................... 3-16
Motion mode ........................................................ 3-84 Symbols (user chart) ............................................ 5-21
Multi view screen ................................................. 3-61 System configuration ............................................. 1-6
My port list ........................................................... 3-86 System restoration in case of abnormal operations ... 3-30

N T
Names and functions .............................................. 2-2 Table editing menu ................................................. 4-6
Navtex mark ......................................................... 3-92 Table editing mode ........................................ 4-5, 4-11
Navtex message .................................................... 3-92 Table editor (route planning) .................................. 4-5
North arrow mark ................................................... 2-4 Table view (chart portfolio) ................................... 8-7
Note and diagram (ARCS Only) .......................... 3-48 Temporary and preliminary notice (ARCS) ......... 3-48
Numerical input .................................................... 3-10 Text (user chart) ................................................... 5-31
Tidal stream mark ................................................. 3-57
O Time label display ................................................ 3-68
Object category .................................................... 3-34 To WP ................................................................... 3-31
Operation panel ...................................................... 2-2 Tool menu ............................................................... 7-2
Over scale alarm ................................................... 3-41 Track display ............................................... 3-68, 3-69
Trackball ................................................................. 3-3
P Troubleshooting .................................................... 10-3
Playback mode ....................................................... 9-2
Playback panel........................................................ 9-4 U
Power OFF ........................................................... 3-18 User chart ............................................................. 3-52
Power ON ............................................................. 3-15
Primary position ................................................... 3-64 W
Printing out ......................................................... 3-117 Wide view screen ................................................. 3-62

R Z
Radar image ([RADAR]) ..................................... 3-23 Zooming in/out ..................................................... 3-41
Range .................................................................... 3-42
Reading out information of objects ([INFO]) ...... 3-59
Right-click .............................................................. 3-3
ROUTE ................................................................. 3-31
Route monitoring and system alarm ...................... 6-6
Route name and file type ........................................ 4-3
Route options .......................................................... 4-4
Route planning ....................................................... 4-2
Route type .............................................................. 4-2
Rubber band ......................................................... 3-40
Running fix ........................................................... 3-80

S
S57/C-Map chart .................................................. 3-51
Scale ..................................................................... 3-43
Secondary position ............................................... 3-64
Setting alarm options ......................................... 3-107
Setting ARPA/AIS options ................................. 3-111
Setting date/time ................................................. 3-114
Setting logbook options ....................................... 3-91
Setting radar options .......................................... 3-109
Setting scales ...................................................... 3-106
Setting the chart options ....................................... 3-93
Shifting chart ........................................................ 3-36

Index 2/2
END-USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
FOR JAN-901 SERIES ECDIS SOFTWARE

IMPORTANT-READ CAREFULLY: This End-User License Agreement


(“EULA”) is a legal agreement between you (either an individual or a single
entity) and Japan Radio Co., Ltd. (“JRC”) for the JRC ECDIS equipment
that includes Microsoft software products.
● You have acquired a device (“DEVICE”) that includes software licensed by JRC from
Microsoft Licensing Inc. or its affiliates (“MS”). Those installed software products of MS
origin, as well as associated media, printed materials, and “online” or electronic documen-
tation (“SOFTWARE”) are protected by international intellectual property laws and
treaties. The SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
● IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS EULA, DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. INSTEAD, PROMPTLY CONTACT JRC FOR INSTRUCTIONS
ON RETURN OF THE UNUSED DEVICE(S) FOR A REFUND. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICA-
TION OF ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).

● GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE. This EULA grants you the following license:
➢ You may use the SOFTWARE only on the DEVICE.
➢ NOT FAULT TOLERANT. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT TOLERANT. JRC HAS
INDEPENDENTLY DETERMINED HOW TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN THE DEVICE,
AND MS HAS RELIED UPON JRC TO CONDUCT SUFFICIENT TESTING TO DETER-
MINE THAT THE SOFTWARE IS SUITABLE FOR SUCH USE.
➢ NO WARRANTIES FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE SOFTWARE is provided “AS IS”
and with all faults. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PER-
FORMANCE, ACCUARACY, AND EFFORT (INCLUDING LACK OF NEGLI-
GENCE) IS WITH YOU . ALSO THERE IS NO WARRANTY AGAINST INTERFER-
ENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE OR AGAINST INFRINGE-
MENT. IF YOU HAVE RECEIVED ANY WARRANTIES REGARDING THE DEVICE
OR THE SOFTWARE, THOSE WARRANTIES DO NOT ORIGINATE FROM, AND ARE
NOT BINDING ON, MS.
➢ Note on Java Support. The SOFTWARE may contain support for programs written in Java.
Java technology is not fault tolerant and is not designed, manufactured, or intended for use or
resale as online control equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance,
such as in the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air
traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of Java
technology could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental
damage. Sun Microsystems, Inc. has contractually obligated MS to make this disclaimer.
➢ No Liability for Certain Damages. EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, MS SHALL
HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE
OR PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS LIMITATION SHALL APPLY
EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT
SHALL MS BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO HUNDRED
FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.$250.00).
➢ Limitations on Reverse Engineering, Decompilation, and Disassembly. You may not
reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the SOFTWARE, except and only to the extent
that such activity is expressly permitted by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation.
➢ SOFTWARE TRANSFER ALLOWED BUT WITH RESTRICTIONS. You may perma-
nently transfer rights under this EULA only as part of a permanent sale or transfer of the
Device, and only if the recipient agrees to this EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade, any
transfer must also include all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
➢ EXPROT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that SOFTWARE is of US-origin. You
agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFT-
WARE, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use
and country destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other governments. For additional
information on exporting the SOFTWARE, see http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
For further information contact:

HEAD OFFICE & Nittochi Nishi-shinjuku bldg,


SALES DEPT. 10-1, Nishi-Shinjuku 6-chome, Shinjuku-ku,
Tokyo 160-8328 JAPAN
Phone : +81-3-3348-0151
Fax : +81-3-3348-3648

MAIN PLANT 1-1, Shimorenjaku 5-chome, Mitaka-shi,


Tokyo 181-8510 JAPAN
Phone : +81-422-45-9111
Fax : +81-422-45-9110

EDITION 2
DC50-JAN-901 MAR. 2003
CODE No. 7ZPNA0441 JRC

You might also like